Chevrolet 2006 Silverado 1500 Pickup Specifications

2007 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7
Front Seats .............................................. 9
Rear Seats ............................................. 20
Safety Belts ............................................ 22
Child Restraints ...................................... 46
Airbag System ........................................ 89
Restraint System Check
....................... 112
Features and Controls ..............................
Keys .....................................................
Doors and Locks ..................................
Windows ...............................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems
.......................
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle .....
Mirrors ..................................................
OnStar® System ...................................
Universal Home Remote System
..........
Storage Areas
......................................
Sunroof
................................................
115
117
125
131
135
139
175
185
188
201
205
M
Instrument Panel .......................................
Instrument Panel Overview ...................
Climate Controls ...................................
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ....
Driver Information Center (DIC)
............
Audio System(s) ...................................
209
212
240
252
273
306
Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 377
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
..................................... 378
Towing
................................................. 443
Service and Appearance Care ..................
Service .................................................
Fuel ......................................................
Checking Things Under the Hood .........
Rear Axle .............................................
Four-Wheel Drive ..................................
Front Axle
............................................
Noise Control System ...........................
491
494
496
504
546
548
550
551
1
Bulb Replacement
................................
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
....
Tires .....................................................
Appearance Care ..................................
Vehicle Identification .............................
Electrical System ..................................
Capacities and Specifications ................
2
552
557
558
607
616
617
626
Maintenance Schedule ..............................
Maintenance Schedule ..........................
Customer Assistance Information .............
Customer Assistance and Information ...
Reporting Safety Defects ......................
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy .....
Index ..........................................................
629
630
651
652
667
670
673
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
names SILVERADO and Z71 are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to
make changes after that time without further
notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute
the name “General Motors of Canada Limited”
for Chevrolet Motor Division whenever it appears
in this manual.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25817255 A Second Printing
©
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick
reference.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learn
about the features and controls for the vehicle.
Pictures and words work together in the
owner manual to explain things.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,
refer to the DURAMAX® Diesel supplement for
additional and specific information on this engine.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. A box with the word CAUTION is used to
tell about things that could hurt you or others if you
were to ignore the warning.
4
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to
help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read
these cautions. If you do not, you or others could
be hurt.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not
do this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown
along with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle
which use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ..................................................... 9
Manual Seats ................................................ 9
Power Seats ............................................... 10
Manual Lumbar ........................................... 11
Power Lumbar ............................................. 11
Heated Seats .............................................. 12
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals .............. 13
Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 15
Head Restraints .......................................... 18
Seatback Latches ........................................ 19
Center Seat ................................................ 19
Rear Seats .................................................... 20
Rear Seat Operation (Full Bench) ............... 20
Rear Seat Operation (Split Bench) .............. 21
Safety Belts .................................................. 22
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 22
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 26
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 27
Driver Position ............................................. 28
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 35
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 36
Right Front Passenger Position ................... 37
Center Front Passenger Position
(Regular Cab) .......................................... 37
Center Front Passenger Position
(Crew and Extended Cab) ....................... 38
Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 39
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 42
Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 45
Safety Belt Extender ................................... 45
Child Restraints ............................................ 46
Older Children ............................................. 46
Infants and Young Children ......................... 49
Child Restraint Systems .............................. 53
Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 58
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) .................................... 60
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position ................................... 72
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position .................................. 74
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
(With Airbag Off Switch) .......................... 75
7
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position (With Passenger
Sensing System) ...................................... 81
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position (Heavy Duty
Crew Cab Only) ....................................... 85
Airbag System .............................................. 89
Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 92
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 95
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 97
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 98
8
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................... 98
Airbag Off Switch ...................................... 100
Passenger Sensing System ....................... 103
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 110
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ........................ 111
Restraint System Check ............................. 112
Checking the Restraint Systems ................ 112
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash ................................................. 113
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure
the seat is locked in place.
9
Power Seats
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used
to operate them are located on the outboard
side of the seats.
10
To adjust the seat, do any of the following:
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding
the control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion
by moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion
by moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the
entire control up or down.
On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the
control is located behind the power seat control on
the outboard side of the seats. See “Power
Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining Seatbacks
on page 15.
A vehicle with a memory function allows seat
settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13 for
more information.
Manual Lumbar
Power Lumbar
If your vehicle has this feature, the knob is located
on the front of the driver seat lower cushion on
the outboard side. Turn the knob forward to
increase, and rearward to decrease lumbar
support.
If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used to
operate this feature are located on the outboard
side of the seats.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold
the rear of the control.
• To raise the height of the lumbar support,
press and hold the top of the control.
• To lower the height of the lumbar support,
press and hold the bottom of the control.
11
Release the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of lumbar support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which
allows seat settings to be saved and recalled.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13
for more information.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,
as it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
I (Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn
on the heated seatback.
The light on the button will come on to indicate
that the feature is working. Press the button
to cycle through the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the heat to the
seatback off. Indicator lights below the button show
the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this
Heated Seats
On vehicles with
heated front seats, the
controls are located
on the driver’s and
passenger’s doors,
near the door handle.
button to turn on the heated seat and seatback.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that
the feature is working. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium,
and low and to turn the heat to the seat off.
Indicator lights above the button will show the level
of heat selected: three for high, two for medium,
and one for low.
The heated seats will be canceled ten seconds
after the ignition is turned off. If you want to
use the heated seat feature after you restart your
vehicle, you will need to press the appropriate
heated seat or seatback button again.
12
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
The controls for this
feature are located on
the driver’s door
panel, and are used to
program and recall
memory settings for the
driver’s seat, outside
mirrors, and the
adjustable throttle and
brake pedal.
To save your positions in memory, do the following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable
position.
See Outside Power Mirrors on page 181
and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
on page 143 for more information.
Not all mirrors will have the ability to save
and recall their positions.
Not all adjustable throttles and brake pedals
will have the ability to save and recall their
positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps
are heard indicating that the position has
been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brake
pedal position can be programmed by repeating
the above steps and pressing button 2.
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be
in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or
button 2 corresponding to the desired driving
position. The seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable
throttle and brake pedals will move to the position
previously stored. You will hear a single beep.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
enter your vehicle and the remote recall memory
feature is on, automatic seat, adjustable mirror,
and adjustable pedal movements will occur.
See “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 295
for more information.
13
To stop recall movement of the memory function
at any time, press one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, power mirror buttons, or
adjustable pedal switch.
Easy Exit Seat
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or
the adjustable pedals while recalling a memory
position, the driver’s seat and/or the adjustable
pedals recall may stop working. If this happens,
remove the obstruction and press the appropriate
control for the area that is not responding for
two seconds. Try recalling the memory position
again by pressing the appropriate memory button.
If the memory position is still not recalling, see
your dealer for service.
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exit
position can be recalled by pressing the exit
button. You will hear a single beep, and the
driver’s seat will move back.
The control for this feature is located on the
driver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the
Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic
seat movement will occur when the key is removed
from the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 295 for more information.
The memory seat and easy exit features can also
be programmed using the DIC.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 295.
14
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If the seats have manual reclining seatbacks,
the lever used to operate them is located on the
outboard side of the seat(s).
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
15
To return the seatback to an upright position,
do the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the
control used to recline them is located on the
outboard side of the seat behind the power seat
control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of
the control forward.
16
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a
crash, you could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright.
Then sit well back in the seat and wear
your safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
17
Head Restraints
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
press the release
button, located on the
top of the seatback,
while you push the head
restraint down.
The second row seats have head rests that can
be adjusted up and down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
18
Seatback Latches
Center Seat
The front seatbacks tilt forward to allow access to
the rear of the cab.
Your vehicle may have a front center seat.
The seatback doubles as an armrest and
cupholder/storage area for the driver and
passenger when the center seat is not used.
Do not use it as a seating position when
the seatback is folded down.
To tilt the seatback forward, lift the lever located
on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
For information on safety belts for this position,
see Center Front Passenger Position (Regular
Cab) on page 37 or Center Front Passenger
Position (Crew and Extended Cab) on page 38.
To return the seatback to the upright position,
push the seatback rearward until it latches.
After returning the seatback to its upright position,
push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
19
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation (Full Bench)
Folding the Rear Seat
To fold the seat up, do the following:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
1. Pull up on the front
of the seat cushion
while pulling
down on the release
strap, located
under the seat
cushion.
20
2. Pull the seat cushion up until it latches with
the seatback.
3. After latching the seat cushion up, pull
forward on it to make sure it is locked.
To fold the seat down, do the following:
1. Push the seat cushion rearward while pulling
the release strap, located under the seat
cushion. Pull the seat cushion down until
it latches.
2. After latching the seat cushion, pull up on it to
make sure it is locked.
Rear Seat Operation (Split Bench)
Folding Rear Seat
On a vehicle with a second row 60/40 split seat
either side of the rear seat may be folded for
added cargo space.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed,
not properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the
safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
Make sure that nothing is on the seat.
To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat cushion up.
To return the seat to the normal seating position,
slowly pull the seat cushion down.
Make sure that the safety belt buckles on the
driver’s side seatback are accessible to the
outboard and center occupant and are not under
the seat cushions.
21
Safety Belts
CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
(Continued)
Do not allow people to ride in, or on, any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
This includes riding on the tailgate, even
when the vehicle is operated at low
speeds. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. People riding on the
tailgate can easily lose their balance and
fall in response to vehicle maneuvers.
Falling from a moving vehicle may result
in serious injuries or death.
CAUTION:
22
(Continued)
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
your passengers to buckle your safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 255
and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
(1500 Series) on page 255.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces,
the law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:
They work.
You never know if you will be in a crash.
If you do have a crash, you do not know if it
will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person would
not survive. But most crashes are in between.
In many of them, people who buckle up can
survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts
they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
23
Put someone on it.
24
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
or the instrument panel...
25
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
26
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds
of less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there are
different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see Older
Children on page 46 or Infants and Young Children
on page 49. Follow those rules for everyone’s
protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
27
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
28
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until
it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
see Safety Belt Extender on page 45.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
on page 35.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
29
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
30
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
31
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
32
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at
all times.
33
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
34
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Shoulder belt height adjusters are available for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder
belt adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of
the belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt
should be away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To move the adjuster
down for the regular
and crew cabs, squeeze
the buttons (A) on the
sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to
the desired position.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
Regular and Crew Cab
35
On the extended cabs,
push down on the
release button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the
desired position.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
Extended Cab
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up
on the shoulder belt guide.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down, without squeezing the
buttons for the regular and crew cabs, or without
pushing the release button for extended cabs,
to make sure it has locked into position.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
36
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly,
it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Center Front Passenger Position
(Regular Cab)
Right Front Passenger Position
The center front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature. If this happens, just
let the belt go back all the way and start again.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 28.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature which may turn off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, just
let the belt go back all the way and start again.
To learn how to wear the center front passenger’s
safety belt properly, see Driver Position on
page 28.
37
Center Front Passenger Position
(Crew and Extended Cab)
Lap Belt
Your vehicle may have a center front seating
position.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as
shown until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the
lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 45.
When you sit in a center front seating position,
you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and
pull it along the belt.
38
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers
Lap-Shoulder Belt
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.
And they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
39
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it
is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 45.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
40
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are
best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong
pelvic bones. And you would be less likely to
slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
41
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the shoulder belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on
the interior body.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
42
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the
guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
43
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed in
a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
as described in Rear Seat Passengers on
page 39. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guides. Slide the guide onto the
storage clip.
44
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,
near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner activation are met.
And, if your vehicle has side impact rollover
airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten
the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover
event.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in
a crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash on page 113.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When
you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will
wear, so the extender will be long enough for
you. To help avoid personal injury, do not
let someone else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender has been
designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
45
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
46
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center
of the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
Comfort Guides on page 42. If the child is
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety
belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.
47
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
48
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection!
This includes infants and all other children.
Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size
of the traveler changes the need, for everyone,
to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in
every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
49
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it.
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
50
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
51
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child restraints,
there are many different models available.
When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight
and height limitations for a particular child
restraint. In addition, there are many kinds
of restraints available for children with
special needs.
52
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across
the strongest part of an infant’s body,
the back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed.
A young child’s hip bones are still so
small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt
may not remain low on the hip bones, as
it should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
53
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint
with the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
54
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is
a portable one, which is purchased by
the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,
an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within
the child restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
When choosing an add-on child restraint,
be sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
55
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the child restraint is properly installed in
the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt
or LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle.
Child restraint systems must be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of
a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 60 for more information.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint
can move around in a collision or sudden stop
and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in your
vehicle — even when no child is in it.
56
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps,
and a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of
hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which
rests low against the child’s body. A shelf- or
armrest-type shield has straps that are attached
to a wide, shelf-like shield that swings up or to
the side.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
57
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the
front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is off
before using a rear-facing child restraint
in the right front seat position.
Even though the passenger sensing
system or airbag off switch are designed to
turn off the passenger’s frontal airbag
under certain conditions, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
CAUTION:
58
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint, whenever
possible.
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center
front seat can be badly injured or killed by
the right front passenger’s airbag if it
inflates. Never secure a child restraint in
the center front seat. It is always better to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position. The restraints will not work properly.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not
be transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag
is off.
There is limited space in the rear seating area of
an extended cab model. If you want to secure
a child restraint in a rear seating position of
an extended cab model, especially in the rear
center position, be sure to study the instructions
that came with your child restraint to see if there
is enough room to secure your seat properly.
59
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
or the airbag off switch and you need to secure
a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat, the passenger’s frontal airbag
must be off. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 103, Airbag Off Switch on page 100, and
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch) on page 75
or Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing System)
on page 81 or Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position (Heavy Duty Crew
Cab Only) on page 85 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint
can move around in a collision or sudden stop
and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in your
vehicle — even when no child is in it.
60
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle
and attachments on the child restraint that
are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer
will provide you with instructions on how to
use the child restraint and its attachments.
The following explains how to attach a child
restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Lower Anchors
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
61
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)
or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to
the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether
being attached. Others require the top tether
always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires
that forward-facing child restraints have a top
tether, and that the tether be attached. In the
United States, some child restraints also have a
top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
62
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Crew and Extended Cab
Rear Seat
Regular Cab Front Seat
Do not install a child restraint in the center front
seat position. See Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position on page 74 for more
information.
For crew and extended cab models, the rear
outboard seating positions have exposed metal
lower anchors located in the crease between
the seatback and the seat cushion.
63
For regular cab models,
there is an anchor
symbol on the
trim covers to assist you
in locating the top
tether anchors.
Regular Cab
Do not install a child restraint in the center seat
position. See Securing a Child Restraint in
the Center Front Seat Position on page 74 for
more information. For regular cab models, the top
tether anchors are located under trim covers
on the back panel behind the passenger seat.
Remove the trim plug to access the anchor.
64
Be sure to read the instructions following to
properly install a child restraint using these loops.
Do not secure a child restraint in the front
passenger’s position if your vehicle has rear seats,
if a national or local law requires that the top
tether be attached, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached. There is no place to attach the
top tether in this position.
Crew Cab Shown, Extended Cab Similar
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
seat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 58
for additional information.
For crew and extended cab models, the top tether
anchors are the loops located near the top of
the seatback for each rear seating position.
These loops will be used to route the top tether
through, as well as, to secure the top tether in the
vehicle. Be sure to use an anchor (loop) located
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
65
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
66
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor, except the center
top tether anchors in crew and extended
cab models, and lower anchors in the
vehicle are designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash.
A child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has
been installed. Be sure to follow the
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
67
Regular Cab Models
1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if your vehicle has one. Refer to the child
restraint instructions and the following steps:
1.1. Pull the passenger seatback forward
by pulling the recliner handle upward
to access the top tether anchor.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 15
for additional information.
1.2. Find the top tether anchor.
1.3. Remove the trim cover to expose
the anchor.
68
1.4. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the head
restraint.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and
you are using a single
tether, raise the head
restraint and route
the tether under
the head restraint and
in between the head
restraint posts.
2. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch) on
page 75 or Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With Passenger
Sensing System) on page 81 or Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
(Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only) on page 85 for
instructions on installing the child restraint
using the safety belts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Crew and Extended Cab Models
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to
the lower anchors.
69
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether
anchor (loop), if your vehicle has one.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Example — Rear Driver’s Side Position
Example — Rear Driver’s Side Position
70
2.1. When using a child restraint with a top
tether in the rear driver side position:
A. Raise the head rest.
B. Route the top tether (B) between
the head rest posts, through the
loop (A), behind the inboard
head rest post, and under the
center shoulder belt (C).
C. Attach the top tether (B) to the top
tether anchor (loop) (D) at the
center rear seating position.
2.2. When using a child restraint with a top
tether in the rear center position:
A. Route the top tether (B) through
the center loop (D), and behind
the inboard passenger side
head rest post.
B. Attach the top tether (B) to the top
tether anchor (loop) at the rear
passenger side seating position.
2.3. When using a child restraint with a top
tether in the rear passenger position:
A. Raise the head rest.
B. Route the top tether (B) between the
head rest posts, through the loop on
the passenger side and behind the
inboard head rest post.
C. Attach the top tether (B) to the top
tether anchor (loop) (D) at the
center rear seating position.
2.4. Tighten the top tether when and
as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
When the top tether is tightened, the
anchor (loop) may bend. This is normal
and will not damage the vehicle.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
71
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
Extended Cab and Crew Cab
There is limited space in the rear seating of an
extended cab model. If you want to secure a child
restraint in a rear seating position, be sure to
study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to see if there is enough room to secure
your seat properly.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in the child
restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 60.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
72
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt.
73
6. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
child restraint and to Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 60.
7. Push and pull the restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it
go back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center
front seat can be badly injured or killed by
the right front passenger’s airbag if it
inflates. Never secure a child restraint in
the center front seat. It is always better to
secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in this position.
74
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
(With Airbag Off Switch)
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put
the Restraint on page 58.
If one of the switches pictured in the following
illustrations is located in your glove box, your
vehicle has an airbag on-off switch that you can
use to manually turn on or off the right front
passenger’s airbag.
United States
Canada
Your switch may vary slightly. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 100 for more on this, including
important safety information and illustrations
of alternate switch designs.
75
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Be sure to turn off the
airbag before using a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front seat position.
CAUTION:
76
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the airbag off switch is
designed to turn off the passenger’s
airbag, no system is fail safe, and
no one can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes
on when you have turned off the airbag, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. The right front
passenger’s airbag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 100 and Airbag Readiness Light on
page 256 for more on this, including
important safety information.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
we recommend that rear-facing child restraints
not be transported in your vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 60.
If your vehicle has a rear seat, there is no top
tether anchor at the right front seating position.
Do not secure a child seat in this position if a
national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with
the child restraint say that the top tether must be
anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) on page 60 if the child restraint
has a top tether.
77
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Airbag Off Switch on page 100.
We recommend that rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seats
on page 10.
When the airbag off switch has turned off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the
off indicator in the overhead console should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle
and after the system check is completed.
See Airbag Off Light on page 256.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
78
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder belt to tighten the
lap belt portion, and feed the shoulder belt
back into the retractor. If you are using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
You should not be able to pull more of the
belt out of the retractor once the lock has
been set.
79
7. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, and the
position you are using has a top tether anchor,
attach and tighten the top tether to the top
tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 60.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is
attached to the top tether anchor, disconnect
it. Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go
back all the way. The safety belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.
If you had turned the airbag off with the switch,
remember to be sure to use the airbag off switch to
turn on the right front passenger’s airbag when
you remove the child restraint from the vehicle
unless the person who will be sitting there
is a member of the passenger airbag risk group.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 100.
80
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in
a risk group identified by the national
government, that person will not have the
extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 100
for more on this, including important safety
information.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
(With Passenger Sensing System)
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put
the Restraint on page 58.
In addition, your vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant
seat or a small child in a forward-facing child
restraint or booster seat is detected. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 103 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 258 for
more information on this, including important
safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
81
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
we recommend that rear-facing child restraints
not be transported in your vehicle, even if the
airbag is off.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 60.
If your vehicle has a rear seat, there is no top
tether anchor at the right front seating position.
Do not secure a child seat in this position if
a national or local law requires that the top tether
be anchored or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH) on page 60 if the child
restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
82
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 103. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seats
on page 10.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
when you start the vehicle. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 258.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
83
7. If your child restraint manufacturer
recommends using a top tether, and the
position you are using has a top tether anchor,
attach and tighten the top tether to the top
tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 60.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit
and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
84
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the
child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the child restraint.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
(Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only)
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. If you need to
secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right
front seat position, see Where to Put the
Restraint on page 58.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
85
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Always secure a
rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 60.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 60 if
the child restraint has a top tether.
86
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 9 or Power Seats
on page 10.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
87
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
88
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
Your vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A roof-mounted rollover airbag for the driver
and right front passenger.
• A roof-mounted rollover airbag for the second
row outboard passenger positions.
If your vehicle has roof-mounted rollover airbags,
the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbag
covering on the headliner above the sidewall trim
near the driver’s and right front passenger’s
window and the rear passenger’s outboard seating
positions.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
89
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide
less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
CAUTION:
90
(Continued)
(Continued)
Roof-mounted rollover airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle, during a vehicle rollover,
or in a severe frontal impact. They are not
designed to inflate in rear crashes. If your
vehicle has roof-mounted airbags, they
are designed to provide both side impact
protection and rollover protection.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and roof-mounted side impact
airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. If you are too close to
an inflating airbag, as you would be if you
were leaning forward, it could seriously
injure you. Safety belts help keep you in
position for airbag inflation before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer the best
protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always
secure children properly in your vehicle.
To read how, see Older Children on
page 46 or Infants and Young Children
on page 49.
91
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
airbag symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 256 for more information.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
92
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbag
for the driver and the person seated directly
behind the driver, it is located in the ceiling above
the side windows.
93
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted rollover airbag
for the right front passenger and the person
directly behind that passenger, it is located in the
ceiling above the side windows.
94
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the bag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything between
an occupant and an airbag, and do not
attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle
by routing the rope or tie down through any
door or window opening. If you do, the path
of an inflating side impact airbag will be
blocked. The path of an inflating airbag
must be kept clear.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
airbags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they
are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment threshold.
Deployment thresholds take into account a variety
of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate
and help restrain the occupants. Whether
your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle
slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,
the airbags could inflate at a different
crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into
the object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
95
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which
enables the sensing system to monitor the
fore and aft position of the driver’s seat. Seat
position sensors provide information that is used
to determine if the airbags should deploy at a
reduced level or at full deployment.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-mounted
rollover airbags and a rollover sensor. See
Airbag System on page 89. These “rollover
capable” airbags are intended to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes, during a rollover,
or in a severe frontal impact. A roof-mounted
rollover airbag will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed “threshold level.”
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Roof-mounted airbags are not intended
to inflate in rear impacts. Both roof-mounted
rollover airbags will deploy when either side of
the vehicle is struck, during a rollover, or in
a severe frontal impact.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows
96
down. For roof-mounted rollover airbags, inflation
is determined by the location and severity of
the impact or a rollover event.
The airbag system is designed to work properly
under a wide range of conditions, including off-road
usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially
on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
See Off-Road Driving on page 394 for tips on
off-road driving.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of
your vehicle is 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) or above, your
vehicle has single stage airbags. If the GVWR
is below 8,500 lb (3 855 kg), your vehicle has dual
stage airbags. You can find the GVWR on the
certification label on the rear edge of the driver’s
door. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428
for more information.
Single Stage Airbags
If your vehicle has frontal airbags with single stage
deployment and your vehicle goes straight into
a wall that does not move or deform, the threshold
level is about 12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with
specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range.
Dual Stage Airbags
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
If your vehicle has frontal airbags with dual stage
deployment, the amount of restraint will adjust
according to crash severity. Your vehicle has
electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing
system distinguish between a moderate and a
more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal
impacts, these airbags inflate at a level less
than full deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of your
vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not
move or deform, the threshold level for the
reduced deployment is about 9 to 16 mph
(14 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 23 mph (29 to 37 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with
specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat
above or below this range. Vehicle’s with dual
stage airbags also have a sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of
the driver seat. The seat position sensor provides
information which is used to determine if the
airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at
full deployment.
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is
in a crash. In the case of a roof-mounted rollover
airbag, the sensing system detects that the
vehicle is about to roll over or has been in a severe
frontal impact or a moderate to severe side
impact. The sensing system triggers a release of
gas from the inflator, which inflates the airbag.
The inflator, airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag modules inside the steering
wheel and in the instrument panel in front of
the right front passenger. For vehicles with
roof-mounted rollover airbags, the airbag modules
are located in the ceiling of the vehicle, near
the side windows.
97
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided
by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But the frontal airbags would not help you in
many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear
impacts, and many side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Roof-mounted rollover airbags would not help you
in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then
only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions or rollovers for vehicles
with roof-mounted rollover airbags.
98
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
an airbag inflated. Roof-mounted rollover airbags
may still be at least partially inflated minutes
after the vehicle comes to rest. Some components
of the airbag module — the steering wheel hub
for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s airbag, and the
area along the ceiling of the vehicle near the side
windows for vehicles with roof–mounted side
impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There may be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,
and flash the hazard warning flashers when the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors again, turn
the interior lamps off, and turn off the hazard
warning flashers by using the controls for those
features.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.
After an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for your airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy on page 670 and Event Data
Recorders on page 671.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag system. Improper service can mean
that an airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
99
Airbag Off Switch
If one of the switches pictured in the following
illustrations is located in your glove box, your
vehicle has an airbag on-off switch that you can
use to manually turn on or off the right front
passenger’s airbag. Your switch may vary slightly.
This switch should only be turned to the off
position if the person in the right front passenger’s
position is a member of a passenger risk group
identified by the national government as follows:
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
• My vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• The infant has a medical condition which,
according to the infant’s physician, makes
it necessary for the infant to ride in the front
seat so that the driver can constantly
monitor the child’s condition.
United States
Canada
If your vehicle does not have an airbag off switch,
it may have a passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 103.
100
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• My vehicle has no rear seat;
• Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the
rear seat(s) whenever possible, children
ages 1 to 12 sometimes must ride in the front
because no space is available in the rear
seat(s) of my vehicle; or
• The child has a medical condition which,
according to the child’s physician, makes
it necessary for the child to ride in the front
seat so that the driver can constantly monitor
the child’s condition.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
• Causes the passenger airbag to pose a
special risk for the passenger; and
• Makes the potential harm from the passenger
airbag in a crash greater than the potential
harm from turning off the airbag and allowing
the passenger, even if belted, to hit the
dashboard or windshield in a crash.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in
a risk group identified by the national
government, that person will not have the
extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag
unless the person sitting there is in a
risk group.
101
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
To turn off the right front passenger’s airbag,
insert your ignition key into the switch, push in,
and move the switch to the off position.
The word OFF or the off symbol will come on in
the passenger airbag status indicator located in the
overhead console to let you know that the right
front passenger’s airbag is off, after the system
check is completed. The airbag off light will come
on and stay on to let you know that the right
front passenger’s airbag is off. See Airbag Off Light
on page 256.
102
If the airbag readiness light ever comes
on when you have turned off the airbag,
it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. The right front
passenger’s airbag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 256 for additional
information.
Passenger Sensing System
If your vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in
the following illustrations, then your vehicle has
a passenger sensing system for the right front
passenger’s position, unless there is an airbag off
switch located in the glovebox. If there is an
airbag off switch, your vehicle does not have a
passenger sensing system. See Airbag Off Switch
on page 100 for more information.
United States
Canada
The passenger airbag status indicator will be
visible on the overhead console when you start
your vehicle.
To turn the right front passenger’s airbag on
again, insert your ignition key into the switch, push
in, and move the switch to the on position.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is now
enabled (may inflate). See Airbag Off Light
on page 256 for more information.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, will be visible during the system check.
103
When the system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or
the symbol for off, will be visible. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on page 258.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of
the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat and safety belt. The sensors are designed
to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
104
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the
front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
CAUTION:
(Continued)
(Continued)
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that
will accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,
we recommend that rear-facing child restraints
not be transported in your vehicle, even if
the airbag is off.
105
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
106
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 258.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
(With Airbag Off Switch) on page 75 or Securing a
Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
(With Passenger Sensing System) on page 81 or
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (Heavy Duty Crew Cab Only)
on page 85.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 18.
Remove any additional material from the seat
cushion before reinstalling or securing the child
restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer.
If no rear seat is available, do not install a child
restraint in this vehicle, and check with your
dealer/retailer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the
right front passenger’s seat. When the passenger
sensing system has allowed the airbag to be
enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag, depending
upon the person’s seating posture and body build.
Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown
child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
107
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position
on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,
which helps the passenger sensing system
maintain the passenger airbag status. See “Safety
Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for
additional information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
108
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger’s
seat may not have the protection of the
airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 256 for more on this, including
important safety information.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a
blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers
can affect how well the passenger sensing
system operates. Remove any additional material
from the seat cushion before reinstalling or
securing the child restraint and before a small
occupant, including a small adult, sits in the
right front passenger’s seat. You may want to
consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 111 for more
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
109
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be
serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle. You do
not want the system to inflate while someone is
working on your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer
and the service manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 669.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
110
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front
Q: What if I added a snow plow? Will it keep
the airbags from working properly?
A: We have designed our airbag systems to work
properly under a wide range of conditions,
including snow plowing with vehicles that
have the optional Snow Plow Prep Package
(RPO VYU). But do not change or defeat the
snow plow’s “tripping mechanism.” If you do, it
can damage your snow plow and your vehicle,
and it may cause an airbag inflation.
or sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height, front
end or side sheet metal, they may keep the
airbag system from working properly. Also, the
airbag system may not work properly if you
relocate any of the airbag sensors. If you have
any questions about this, you should contact
Customer Assistance before you modify your
vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 652.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
A:
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, rollover sensor module,
steering wheel, instrument panel, overhead
console, ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillar
garnish trim, roof-mounted rollover airbag
modules, or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 652.
111
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety
belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job,
have it repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Care of Safety Belts on page 610 for more
information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
112
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. The airbag
system does not need regular maintenance.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the
driver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag,
or the side impact airbag covering on the
ceiling near the side windows, the airbag may
not work properly. You may have to replace
the airbag module in the steering wheel, both
the airbag module and the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s airbag, or
side impact airbag module and ceiling covering
for roof-mounted rollover airbags (if equipped).
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make
sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected
and any necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash,
then you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage may also mean you may need to have
LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or
replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary
even if the belt or LATCH system was not being
used at the time of the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace
airbag system parts. See the part on the airbag
system earlier in this section.
If an airbag inflates, you may also need to replace
the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt assemblies. Be sure to do so. Then the new
assemblies will be there to help protect you in
a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt assemblies,
even if the airbags have not deployed. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle
has been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle or while
you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 256.
113
✍ NOTES
114
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ............................................................ 117
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........ 118
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation ............................................... 119
Doors and Locks ........................................ 125
Door Locks ................................................ 125
Power Door Locks ..................................... 126
Delayed Locking ........................................ 126
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ........ 126
Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 127
Lockout Protection ..................................... 128
Rear Doors ............................................... 128
Tailgate ..................................................... 129
Windows ...................................................... 131
Manual Windows ....................................... 131
Power Windows ........................................ 132
Power Sliding Rear Window ...................... 134
Sun Visors ................................................ 135
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 135
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 135
PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 137
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 137
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 139
New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 139
Ignition Positions ....................................... 140
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 141
Starting the Engine .................................... 141
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .......... 143
Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 144
Active Fuel Management™ ........................ 145
Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 146
Tow/Haul Mode ......................................... 152
Four-Wheel Drive ...................................... 154
Parking Brake ........................................... 169
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 170
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 172
Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 172
Engine Exhaust ......................................... 173
Running the Engine While Parked ............. 174
115
Section 2
Features and Controls
Mirrors ......................................................... 175
Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 175
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display .............................. 175
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display ................................................... 178
Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 179
Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors ....................... 180
Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 181
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors ............... 182
OnStar® System .......................................... 185
116
Universal Home Remote System ................ 188
System Identification .................................. 188
Universal Home Remote System ............... 189
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED) ....... 190
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED) ....... 194
Storage Areas ............................................. 201
Glove Box ................................................. 201
Cupholder(s) .............................................. 201
Instrument Panel Storage Area .................. 202
Center Console Storage Area .................... 202
Luggage Carrier ........................................ 203
Rear Seat Armrest .................................... 204
Cargo Management System ...................... 204
Sunroof ....................................................... 205
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows
will function with the keys in the ignition
and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
Your vehicle has one double-sided key for the
ignition, all door locks, and the spare tire
hoist lock, if your vehicle has one.
117
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer/retailer will
be able to assist you with obtaining replacements.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call
the Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 658.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If the vehicle has a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
118
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This
is normal for any RKE system. If the transmitter
does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far
from your vehicle. You may need to stand
closer during rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement or
resynchronization is necessary. See “Battery
Replacement” and “Resynchronization”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 119.
• If you are still having trouble, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 118.
The following functions
may be available if
your vehicle has
the remote keyless
entry system:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked
from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m)
away with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can
also start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
The RKE transmitter, with the remote start button,
provides an increased operating range of 195 feet
(60 m) away. However, the operating range may be
less while the vehicle is running. As a result, you
may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off
than you were to start it.
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle
has this feature, it may be started from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See “Remote
Vehicle Start” following for more detailed
information.
119
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the
doors. If enabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once to
indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through
the DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button is
pressed again within five seconds of the previous
press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 295 for
additional information. Pressing the lock button
may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 135.
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again within
five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.
The interior lamps will come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If
enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps will
flash once to indicate unlocking has occurred. See
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 295. Pressing the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrent
system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 135.
120
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release this button to locate your vehicle. The turn
signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound
three times. Press and hold this button for more
than two seconds to activate the panic alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will
sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm
will turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN or
the alarm button is pressed again. The ignition
must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent
another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to
bring any additional transmitters so they can also
be re-coded to match the new transmitter. Once
your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. The vehicle
can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched
to it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC
Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on
page 274 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without
DIC Buttons) on page 281 for instructions on how to
match RKE transmitters to your vehicle.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your RKE
transmitter should last about four years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message in the vehicle’s DIC will display if the
RKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 285 for additional
information.
Notice: When replacing the battery,
use care not to touch any of the circuitry.
Static from your body transferred to these
surfaces may damage the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do
the following:
1. Use a flat object with a thin edge into the
notch, located below the vehicle locator/panic
alarm button, and separate the bottom half
from the top half of the transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a
metal object to do this.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with
the positive side of the battery facing down.
Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent
type. Make sure the cover is on tightly,
so water will not get in.
121
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine
from outside of the vehicle. It may also start up
the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems
and rear window defogger. Normal operation of the
system will return after the key is turned to the
RUN position.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an
automatic climate control system, the climate
control system will default to a heating mode
during colder outside temperatures and a cooling
mode during warmer outside temperatures. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate
control system, during remote start, the climate
control system will turn on at the setting the vehicle
was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an
automatic climate control system and heated
seats, the heated seats will turn on during colder
122
outside temperatures and will shut off when the
key is turned to RUN. If your vehicle does
not have an automatic climate control system,
during remote start, you will need to manually turn
the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
on page 12 for additional information.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use
of remote starters. For example, some laws
may require a person using the remote start to
have the vehicle in view when doing so. Check
local regulations for any requirements on remote
starting of vehicles.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle
is low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of operation. However,
the range may be less while the vehicle is running.
As a result, you may need to be closer to your
vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 118 for
additional information.
/ (Remote Start): Press and release the lock
button and then press and hold the remote
start button to start the vehicle.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,
do the following:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock
button, then immediately press and hold
the transmitter’s remote start button until
the turn signal lights flash. If you cannot
see the vehicle’s lights, press and hold the
remote start button for at least four seconds.
The vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the
remote start button again after the vehicle
has started will turn off the ignition.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will
turn on and remain on while the vehicle is
running.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle
has been driven, repeat these steps, while
the engine is still running, to extend the engine
running time by 10 minutes. Remote start
can be extended one time.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start,
insert and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and
press the remote start button until the
parking lamps turn off.
• Turn on the hazards warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate
times between driving sequences. The engine will
run for 10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote
start time frame, and before the engine stops.
For example, if the lock button and then the
remote start buttons are pressed again after
the vehicle has been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to run
for 15 minutes.
The additional ten minutes are considered a
second remote vehicle start.
123
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start
with one time extension has been done, the
vehicle must be started with the key.
After the key is removed from the ignition, the
vehicle can be remote started again.
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key
is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there
is an emission control system malfunction.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote
vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too
high or if the oil pressure gets low.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start
feature are shipped from the factory with the
remote vehicle start system enabled. The system
may be enabled or disabled through the DIC.
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 295
for additional information. If your vehicle does not
have DIC buttons, see your dealer to enable or
disable the remote vehicle start system.
124
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start feature, it may have the remote start ready
feature. This feature allows your dealer to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
If your vehicle has the remote start ready feature,
your RKE transmitter will have extended range
that will allow you to lock or unlock your vehicle
from approximately 197 feet (60 m) away.
See your dealer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to
your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
CAUTION:
Door Locks
(Continued)
• Young children who get into unlocked
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of
a moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash
if the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
vehicles may be unable to get out.
A child can be overcome by extreme
heat and can suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
From the outside, use the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the key in the
driver’s door.
From the inside, use the power door locks or
manual door locks. To lock or unlock the door with
the manual locks, push down or pull up on the
manual lock knob.
125
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
armrest on the front doors.
K (Unlock): Press the side of the switch with
the unlock symbol to unlock the doors.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the
ignition.
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR
LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 295.
Q (Lock): Press the side of the switch with the
lock symbol to lock the doors.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Delayed Locking
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature
enable you to program the vehicle’s power
door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 295 for more information on DIC
programming.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch
and a door is open, the doors will lock five seconds
after the last door is closed. You will hear three
chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is
in use.
Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock
button on the RKE transmitter twice will override
the delayed locking feature and immediately
lock all the doors.
126
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks.
These prevent passengers from opening the
rear doors from the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
Security Lock Label
shown
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and
turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
When you want to open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door
manual lock, using the power door lock
switch, or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter, if the vehicle has one.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot
and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.
The rear doors must be open to access them.
The label showing lock and unlock positions
is located near the lock.
127
Lockout Protection
Rear Doors
This feature protects you from locking the key in
the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and
a front door is open.
Extended Cab
If the driver’s side power door lock switch is
pressed when the driver’s door is open and the
key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and
then the driver’s door will unlock.
If the passenger’s side power door lock switch
is pressed when the front passenger’s door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will
lock and then the front passenger’s door will
unlock.
Your vehicle may have a rear access door(s) that
allows easier access to the rear area of the
extended cab.
To open a rear access
door from the outside,
first open the front door.
Then, use the handle
located on the front
edge of the rear access
door to open it.
You must fully close a rear access door before
you can close the front door.
128
To open a rear access
door from the inside,
the front door must be
opened first. Then,
use the handle located
on the inside of the
rear access door
to open.
Crew Cabs
If your vehicle is a crew cab, you can open your
doors from the inside or outside. Your vehicle may
also have a feature which prevents children
from opening the rear doors. See Rear Door
Security Locks on page 127 for more information.
Tailgate
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the
tailgate, even when the vehicle is operated
at low speeds. People riding on the
tailgate can easily lose their balance and
fall in response to vehicle maneuvers.
Falling from a moving vehicle may result
in serious injuries or death. Do not allow
people to ride on the tailgate. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
On vehicles with a lock on the tailgate, use the
key to lock or unlock the tailgate.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while
pulling the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it
latches.
After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back
towards you to be sure it latches securely.
129
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate can be removed to allow for different
loading situations. Although the tailgate can be
removed without assistance, you may want
someone to assist you with the removal to
avoid possible damage to the vehicle.
To remove the tailgate, do the following:
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly and release
both retaining cable
clips. To release the
retaining cable clips,
lift the cable so it
points straight out.
Lift the clip over the
bolt, and push the
cable forward then
rotate down.
130
2. With the tailgate about halfway open, lift the
right edge of the tailgate from the lower pivot.
On vehicles with the tailgate assist feature,
raise the tailgate nearly all the way to the
closed position prior to removing the left edge.
3. Move the tailgate to the right to release the
left edge.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall the tailgate.
Make sure the tailgate is secure.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to manually
raise or lower the manual windows.
131
Power Windows
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome from
extreme heat in warm or hot weather and
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows
will function with the keys in the ignition
and they could be seriously injured or
CAUTION:
132
(Continued)
(Continued)
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle
with children.
When there are children in the rear seat
use the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
If your vehicle has power windows, the controls
are located on each of the side doors in the front
and rear for crew cab and extended cab models.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger’s
and rear windows as well. Your power windows
will work when the ignition has been turned
to ACCESSORY or RUN or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on page 141.
K (Window Up/Down): Press the switch down
to lower the window, and pull up the front of
the switch to raise the window.
Express Down Windows
Window Lockout
The driver and front passenger windows also have
an express down feature that allows the windows
to be lowered without holding the switch. Press
down fully on the window switch, then release,
to activate the express down mode. The express
down mode can be canceled at any time by
pulling up on the switch. To open the window
partway, press the switch to the first depression
position, until the window is at the desired position.
o (Window Lockout): If your crew cab or
extended cab vehicle has power windows, the
driver’s door power window switch has a lockout
feature. The lockout switch is located in front of the
window switches. This feature prevents the rear
windows from operating, except from the driver’s
position. Press the switch to engage or disengage
the lockout feature. An indicator light on the switch
will come on when the lockout feature is engaged,
and will go off when disengaged.
133
Power Sliding Rear Window
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome from
extreme heat in warm or hot weather and
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows
will function with the keys in the ignition
and they could be seriously injured or
CAUTION:
134
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle
with children.
When there are children in the rear seat
use the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
On vehicles equipped
with a power sliding rear
window, the switch is
located in the overhead
console.
The power sliding rear window will work when
the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY,
RUN, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 141 for more information.
The power sliding rear window cannot be operated
manually.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
To activate the
theft-deterrent system:
Press the rear of the switch to open the window.
Press the front of the switch to close the window.
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Swing the
sun visor to the side to cover the side window.
The passenger’s side sun visor may have a vanity
mirror.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing
we put on it can make it impossible to steal.
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. The security light
should come on and flash. The door does
not need to be open.
If the delayed locking feature is active, the
alarm will not be activated until all doors are
closed and the security light goes off.
3. Close all doors. The security light will stop
flashing and go off after approximately
30 seconds. The content theft deterrent alarm
is not armed until the security light goes off.
135
If a locked door is opened without using the
key in the driver’s door key cylinder or the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur.
The horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If the
key is not placed in the ignition and turned to
START or the door is not unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the RKE transmitter during the
ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Your
vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will
sound for about two minutes, then will turn off to
save the battery power.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the
doors are locked with the vehicle’s key or the
manual door lock. It activates only if you use the
power door lock switch with the door open or
the RKE transmitter. You should also remember
that you can start your vehicle with the correct
ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the
theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should
be locked with the door key after the doors
are closed.
• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm if the system has been armed.
136
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the
alarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter or
by placing the key in the ignition and turning it
to START.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s
window and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with
the RKE transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait
for the security light to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
door with the manual door lock and open the
door. This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but
the vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the
horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 618.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s
headlamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer
for service.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency
transponder in the key that matches a decoder
in your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent
system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent
system. This means you do not have to do anything
special to arm or disarm the system. It works when
you transition the key to RUN, ACCESSORY or
START from the OFF position.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it prevents the
vehicle from starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error
method to start the vehicle will be discouraged
because of the high number of electrical key codes.
If the engine does not start and the security
light on the instrument panel cluster comes on
when trying to start the vehicle, the key may have
a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off
and try again.
137
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be undamaged, try another ignition
key. At this time, you may also want to check
the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 618. If the engine still does not start with
the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your
vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.
See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In
an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder
to learn the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to nine additional keys
may be programmed for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do
not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that
is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates
the system.
138
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped
on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key
in the ignition and start the engine. If the
engine will not start, see your dealer/retailer
for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn
it to the RUN position within five seconds of
removing the original key.
The security light will turn off once the key
has been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
If you are driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your
engine. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
may not be working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key® III+ to have a new
key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the
vehicle.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 449 for the trailer
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant
speed, fast or slow, for the first
500 miles (805 km). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting
to brake, or slow, the vehicle.
139
Ignition Positions
Use the key to turn
the ignition switch to
four different positions.
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets things like
the radio and the windshield wipers operate while
the engine is off.
Lengthy operation of features such as the radio
in the ACCESSORY ignition position and the RUN
position may drain the battery and prevent your
vehicle from starting. Do not operate your vehicle
in the ACCESSORY ignition position for a long
period of time.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving. It is the
position the ignition switch returns to after the
engine starts, and the key is released.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. The key
can only be removed when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left and
right while you turn the key hard. If none of this
works, then your vehicle needs service.
140
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACCESSORY or RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for
an extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Key In the Ignition
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound, when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transmission. Also, always
remember to lock the doors.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The vehicle accessories can be used for up
to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• OnStar® System (if equipped)
• Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the key is in RUN or
ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from RUN to
LOCK, the windows and sunroof continue to work
until a door is opened. The radio continues to work
for up to 10 minutes or until the driver’s door is
opened.
Starting the Engine
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,
see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
To place the transmission in the proper gear:
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start
in any other position -- this is a safety feature.
To restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
141
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go
down as your engine gets warm. Do not race
the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently
to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects components.
If the ignition key is turned to the START
position, and then released when the engine
begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start and the key
is held in START for many seconds, cranking
will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running. Engine cranking
can be stopped by turning the ignition switch
to the ACCESSORY or LOCK position.
142
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F
or −18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and holding it there as you
hold the key in START for up to a maximum of
15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between
each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool
down. When the engine starts, let go of the
key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, do the same thing. This
clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do
not race the engine immediately after starting
it. Operate the engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving
parts.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work
with the electronics in your vehicle. If you
add electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your
vehicle’s warranty.
The switch used to
adjust the pedals
is located on the
instrument panel
below the climate
control system.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
On vehicles with this feature, you can change
the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since
the pedals cannot move farther away from the
standard position, but can move toward the driver
for better pedal reach.
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when
the vehicle is in REVERSE (R) or while using
the cruise control.
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to
move the pedals closer to your body. Press
the arrow at the top of the switch to move the
pedals away from your body.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake
pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you.
While driving, make only small adjustments.
Your vehicle may have a memory function
which lets pedal settings be saved and recalled.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 13
for more information.
143
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
®
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel
engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for
more information.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the
engine coolant heater can help. You will get easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine
warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged
in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use
of the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle
may also have an internal thermostat in the
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of
the engine coolant heater when the temperature
is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.
144
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The cord is located on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment, near
the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded
110-volt AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer/retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can
give you the best advice for that particular area.
Active Fuel Management™
Your vehicle’s V8 engine may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine
to operate on either all or half of its cylinders,
depending on the driving conditions.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate
in the half cylinder mode, allowing your vehicle
to achieve better fuel economy. When greater
power demands are required, such as accelerating
from a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway,
the system will maintain full-cylinder operation.
Your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™
indicator. For more information on using this
display see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 274 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281.
145
Automatic Transmission Operation
If your vehicle is has an automatic transmission,
it has an electronic shift position indicator
within the instrument panel cluster. This display
comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the RUN position.
There are several
different positions for
the shift lever.
Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed
Automatic Transmission
146
Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission
See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start
the engine because your vehicle cannot move
easily. When parked on a hill, especially when
the vehicle has a heavy load, you might notice
an increase in the effort to shift out of Park.
See Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
under Shifting Into Park (P) on page 170 for
more information.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
If you have Four-Wheel Drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll — even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is
in a drive gear, Two-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive
Low — not in NEUTRAL. See Shifting Into
Park (P) on page 170.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 170.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a
Trailer on page 449.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) only
after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out
of snow, ice, or sand without damaging your
transmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 426.
147
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while your engine is running
at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at
high speed may damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
148
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
It provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the
next gear and has more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills,
or for off-road driving. You might want to shift
the transmission to a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding. See Skidding
under Loss of Control on page 393
Your vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that
adjusts the transmission shifting to the current
driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts
and downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is
designed to determine, before making an upshift,
if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed
by analyzing things such as vehicle speed,
throttle position, and vehicle load.
If the shift stabilization feature determines that a
current vehicle speed cannot be maintained,
the transmission does not upshift and instead
holds the current gear. In some cases, this could
appear to be a delayed shift, however the
transmission is operating normally.
Your vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shift
controls. Adaptive shift controls continually
compares key shift parameters to pre-programmed
ideal shifts stored in the transmissions computer.
The transmission constantly makes adjustments to
improve vehicle performance according to how the
vehicle is being used, such as with a heavy load or
when temperature changes. During this adaptive
shift control process, shifting might feel different as
the transmission determines the best settings.
When temperatures are very cold, the Allison
Transmission® and Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
transmission’s gear shifting could be delayed
providing more stable shifts until the engine warms
up. Shifts could be more noticeable with a cold
transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.
MANUAL MODE (M): This position, is available
on vehicles with the Allison Transmission® or
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission. It lets drivers
select the range of gears appropriate for current
driving conditions. If your vehicle has this feature,
see Range Select Mode (Allison Transmission® or
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission) later in this
section.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving. It reduces vehicle speed more than
DRIVE (D) without using the brakes. You might
choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D) when
driving on hilly, winding roads, when towing
a trailer, so there is less shifting between
gears and when going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speed
even more than THIRD (3) without using your
brakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can
help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want
to use the brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2) in an
automatic transmission, the transmission will
start in second gear. You can use this feature
for reducing the speed of the rear wheels when
you are trying to start your vehicle from a stop on
slippery road surfaces.
149
FIRST (1): For the Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed
transmission this position reduces vehicle speed
even more than SECOND (2) without using
the brakes. You can use it on very steep hills,
or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put
in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward,
the transmission does not shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
For an Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic®
6-Speed transmission, this position reduces
vehicle speed without using your brakes. You can
use it for major/severe downgrades and off-road
driving where the vehicle would otherwise
accelerate due to steepness of grade. When you
shift to FIRST (1) it provides the lowest gear
appropriate to your current road speed and
continues to downshift as the vehicle slows,
eventually downshifting to FIRST (1) gear.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only
the accelerator pedal may damage the
transmission. The repair will not be covered
by your warranty. If you are stuck, do not
spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
150
Range Selection Mode (Allison® or
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Transmission)
Your vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode.
The Range Selection Mode helps control the
vehicle’s transmission and vehicle speed while
driving down hill or towing a trailer by letting
you select a desired range of gears.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to the MANUAL
MODE (M).
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on
the steering column shift lever, to select
the desired range of gears for your current
driving conditions.
When MANUAL MODE (M) is selected a number
displays next to the M, indicating the current gear.
This number is the highest gear that can be used.
However, your vehicle can automatically shift to
lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions.
This means that all gears below that number are
available. When FIFTH (5) is selected, FIRST (1)
through FIFTH (5) gears are automatically shifted
by the vehicle, but SIXTH (6) cannot be used until
the plus/minus button located on the steering
column lever is used to change to the gear.
Grade Braking is not available when the Range
Selection Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on
page 152.
While using the Range Selection mode feature,
cruise control and the Tow/Haul mode can
be used.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the
vehicle in one place on a hill using only
the accelerator pedal may damage the
transmission. The repair will not be covered
by your warranty. If you are stuck, do not spin
the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Low Traction Mode
If your vehicle has the Allison Transmission®, or
the Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic Transmission,
it has a Low Traction Mode that assist in vehicle
acceleration when road conditions are slippery,
such as with ice or snow. While the vehicle is at a
stop, select the second gear range using the Range
Selection system. This will limit torque to the wheels
after it detects wheel slip, preventing the tires from
spinning.
151
Tow/Haul Mode
The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission
shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing
increased performance, vehicle control, and
transmission cooling when towing or hauling
heavy loads.
The selector button is located on the end of
the shift lever. Turn the tow/haul on and off by
pressing the button. When the tow/haul is
on, a light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 272 for more
information.
Also see Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer
on page 449 for more information.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, it
has a tow/haul mode. If your vehicle has an Allison
or Hydra-Matic® 6-speed automatic transmission
see “Tow/Haul Mode (Allison or Hydra-Matic®
6-Speed Automatic Transmission®) following.
152
Tow/Haul Mode (Allison Transmission®
or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission)
Turn the tow/haul mode on and off by pressing
the button, located on the end of the shift
lever. When the tow/haul is on, a light on the
instrument panel cluster will come on.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 272 for more
information.
Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Trailer
on page 449 for more information.
Grade Braking (Allison Transmission®
or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission)
If your vehicle has an Allison or Hydra-Matic®
6-speed automatic transmission®, it has a tow/haul
mode. The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission
shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing
increased performance, vehicle control, and
transmission cooling when towing or hauling
heavy loads.
The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated
by pressing the button on the end of the shift
control lever. While in Range Selection Mode,
Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driver
to select a desired range of gears.
153
Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul
Mode is selected and you are not in the Range
Selection Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode listed
previously and Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 146 for more information on the Range
Selection Mode. Grade Braking assists in
maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving
on downhill grades by automatically implementing
a shift schedule that utilizes the engine and
transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces wear
on the braking system and increases control of the
vehicle. Grade Braking monitors vehicle speed,
acceleration, engine torque and brake pedal usage.
Using this information, it detects when the truck is
on a downhill grade and the driver desires to slow
the vehicle by pressing the brake. See the diesel
supplement for information on Cruise Grade
Braking.
Also see Towing a Trailer on page 449 for more
information.
Four-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, you can
send the engine’s driving power to all four wheels
for extra traction. To get the most satisfaction
out of Four-Wheel Drive, you must be familiar with
its operation. Read the part that follows before
using Four-Wheel Drive. See the appropriate
text for the transfer case in your vehicle.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive
Low for an extended period of time may cause
premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain.
Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive
Low for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during
tight turns, you may experience vibration in
the steering system.
Front Axle Locking Feature
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically
when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for
the axle to lock or unlock is normal.
154
Manual Transfer Case
Some delay between shifting and when the
indicator light comes on is normal.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
Normal
Severe
Extreme
Transfer Case Settings
2m
4m
4n
N
YES
YES
YES
Vehicle in Tow*
YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 443
Towing Your Vehicle on page 443
The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the
right of the driver. Use this lever to shift into
and out of Four-Wheel Drive.
A Four-Wheel Drive
indicator light comes
on when you shift into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages. See
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
on page 271
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended period of time
can cause premature wear on your vehicle’s
powertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavement
in Four-Wheel Drive for extended periods
of time.
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting also
engages the front axle and delivers extra torque.
You may never need Four-Wheel-Drive Low.
It sends maximum power to all four wheels.
155
You might choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you
are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep
snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills.
When operating in Four-Wheel Low, the gear ratio
provides additional torque when compared to
Four-Wheel-Drive High. The transmission gear
shift feel is exaggerated.
A parking brake symbol
is located next to the
N (NEUTRAL) symbol
as a reminder to set the
parking brake before
shifting the transfer
case in Neutral.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL.
See Parking Brake on page 169.
N (NEUTRAL): Shift to this setting only when
your vehicle needs to be towed. See Recreational
Vehicle Towing on page 443 or Towing Your
Vehicle on page 443
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is
used for driving in most street and highway
situations. The front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also provides
the best fuel economy.
156
4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use this setting
when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or
icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting
also engages the front axle to help drive your
vehicle. This is the best setting to use when
plowing snow.
You can shift from Two-Wheel-Drive High to
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive High
to Two-Wheel-Drive High while the vehicle is
moving. In extremely cold weather, it may be
necessary to stop or slow the vehicle to
shift into Four-Wheel-Drive High.
When Using the Manual Transfer Case
• Shifting should be made using quick motions.
Shifting slowly may make it more difficult
to shift.
• You may notice that it is harder to shift when
the vehicle is cold. After the vehicle warms up
the shifting will return to normal.
• While in Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel-Drive
Low you may experience reduced fuel
economy.
• Avoid driving in Four-Wheel Drive on clean,
dry pavement. It may cause your tires to wear
faster, and make the transfer case harder to
shift and run noisier.
• If the transfer case shifter is in the NEUTRAL
position and you have difficulty reaching the
selected transfer case mode, with the engine
running, shift the transmission momentarily to
drive and then back to NEUTRAL. This will
realign the gear teeth in the transfer case
and allow you to complete the shift.
Shifting from Two-Wheel-Drive High to
Four-Wheel-Drive High
• Shifts between Two-Wheel-Drive High and
Four-Wheel-Drive High can be made at
any vehicle speed.
• Shift the transfer case lever in one continuous
motion into either the Four-Wheel-Drive High
or Two-Wheel-Drive High position.
• In extremely cold weather, it may be
necessary to slow or stop the vehicle to
shift into Four-wheel-Drive High until your
vehicle has warmed up.
• While in Four-Wheel-Drive High, your vehicle
can be driven at any posted legal speed limit.
157
Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
Notice: Shifting the transfer case into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low while moving at
speeds faster than 3 mph (5 km/h) may
cause premature wear to the transfer case,
and may cause the gears to grind. To avoid
causing premature wear, and grinding the
gears, do not shift the transfer case into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low while the vehicle is
moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low should be
done, if possible, with the vehicle at a slight roll,
3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if
the transmission is in PARK (P). You or
someone else could be seriously injured.
CAUTION:
158
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL.
See Parking Brake on page 169.
• Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low with
the vehicle at a stop may be more difficult.
You may be unable to complete the shift to
Four-Wheel-Drive Low, and will end up in
NEUTRAL. This is normal, and is a function of
the gear teeth aligning in your transfer case.
When this happens, make sure the engine is
on, shift your transmission momentarily to drive
and back to NEUTRAL, and then complete
the shift.
• Shift the transfer case shift lever in one
continuous motion into the Four-Wheel-Drive
Low position.
• When Four-Wheel-Drive Low do not drive
faster than 45 mph. This will reduce wear and
extend the life of your transfer case.
Shifting In or Out of NEUTRAL
1. With the vehicle running and the engine at an
idle set the parking brake.
2. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
Shift the transfer case in one continuous motion
into or out of the NEUTRAL position.
Electronic Transfer Case
The transfer case knob
is located next to the
steering column.
Use the dial to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
Transfer Case Settings
N
4m
4n
2m
Normal
YES
Severe
YES
Extreme
YES
Vehicle in Tow*
YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 443
Towing Your Vehicle on page 443
Driving Conditions
You can choose among four driving settings:
Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the
lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle
to your dealer for service. An indicator light flashes
while shifting the transfer case and remains
illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some
reason the transfer case cannot make a requested
shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting
is used for driving in most street and highway
situations. The front axle is not engaged in
Two-Wheel Drive. This setting also provides the
best fuel economy.
159
4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use the
Four-Wheel-Drive High position when extra traction
is needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or in
most off-road situations. This setting also engages
the front axle to help drive your vehicle. This is
the best setting to use when plowing snow.
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting
also engages the front axle and delivers extra
torque. You may never need this setting. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might
choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low while driving
off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,
and while climbing or descending steep hills.
StabiliTrak® will not engage in this mode.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL.
See Parking Brake on page 169.
N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 443 or
Towing Your Vehicle on page 443 for more
information.
If the SERVICE 4–Wheel Drive message stays on,
you should take your vehicle to your dealer for
service. See “Service 4–Wheel Drive message”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285.
160
Shifting Into Two-Wheel-Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive High
position. This can be done at any speed, except
when shifting from Four-Wheel-Drive Low.
See Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
for more information.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low
When Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehicle
speed should be kept below 45 mph. Extended
high-speed operation in Four-Wheel-Drive
Low may damage or shorten the life of the
drivetrain.
To shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred
method for shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low
is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the
Four-Wheel-Drive Low position. You must
wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator
light to stop flashing and remain on before
shifting your transmission in gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear
before the requested mode indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer
case. To help avoid damaging your vehicle,
always wait for the mode indicator lights
to stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting
between Four-Wheel-Drive Low and
Four-Wheel-Drive High ranges or from
NEUTRAL with the engine running.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive
Low position when your vehicle is in gear and/or
moving, the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator
light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete
the shift unless your vehicle is moving less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is
in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the transfer
case will shift to Four-Wheel-Drive High mode.
161
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Low to
Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive
High, your vehicle must be stopped or moving
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission
in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN.
The preferred method for shifting out of
Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have your vehicle
moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the
knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High, or
Two-Wheel-Drive High position. You must wait for
the Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive
High indicator light to stop flashing and remain
on before shifting the transmission into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear
before the requested mode indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer
case. To help avoid damaging your vehicle,
always wait for the mode indicator lights
to stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting
between Four-Wheel-Drive Low and
Four-Wheel-Drive High ranges or from
NEUTRAL with the engine running.
162
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
or Two-Wheel-Drive High switch position when
your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive High
indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will
not complete the shift unless your vehicle is
moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
Shifting into NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the
following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
2. Set the parking brake and press and hold the
regular brake pedal. See Parking Brake on
page 169 for more information.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
4. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transfer case to
Two-Wheel-Drive High.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise
to NEUTRAL till it stops and hold it for
10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial
to the four low position. The NEUTRAL light
will come on when the transfer case shift
to NEUTRAL is complete.
7. If the engine is running, verify that the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) by shifting
the transmission to REVERSE (R) for
one second, then shift the transmission
to DRIVE (D) for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, which will
turn the engine off.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving
the vehicle.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and
turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Turn the transfer case dial to Two-Wheel-Drive
High.
After the transfer case has shifted out of
NEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out.
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear
before the requested mode indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer
case. To help avoid damaging your vehicle,
always wait for the mode indicator lights
to stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear.
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to
the desired position.
163
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out
of the different modes may cause the transfer
case to enter the shift protection mode. This will
protect the transfer case from possible damage and
will only allow the transfer case to respond to one
shift per 10 seconds. The transfer case may stay in
this mode for up to three minutes.
Automatic Transfer Case
The transfer case knob
is located next to the
steering column.
For information on StabiliTrak®, see StabiliTrak®
System on page 385.
Use the dial to shift into and out of Four-Wheel
Drive.
164
You can choose among five driving settings:
Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly
when you turn on the ignition and one will stay
on. If the lights do not come on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service.
An indicator light will flash while shifting the
transfer case. It will remain illuminated when the
shift is complete. If for some reason the transfer
case cannot make a requested shift, it will return
to the last chosen setting.
2 m(Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting
is used for driving in most street and highway
situations. The front axle is not engaged in
Two-Wheel Drive. This setting also provides
the best fuel economy.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This
setting is ideal for use when road surface traction
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle
in AUTO, the front axle is engaged, but the
vehicle’s power is sent only to the front and rear
wheels automatically based on driving conditions.
Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel
economy than Two-Wheel-Drive High.
4 m(Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use the
Four-Wheel-Drive High position when extra
traction is needed, such as on snowy or icy roads
or in most off-road situations. This setting also
engages the front axle to help drive your vehicle.
This is the best setting to use when plowing snow.
4 n(Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting
also engages the front axle and delivers extra
torque. You may never need this setting. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might
choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are driving
off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,
and while climbing or descending steep hills.
StabiliTrak® will not engage in this mode.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 385 for
more information.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or
someone else could be seriously injured.
Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in NEUTRAL.
See Parking Brake on page 169.
N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 443 or
Towing Your Vehicle on page 443 for more
information.
If the SERVICE 4–Wheel Drive message stays on,
you should take your vehicle to your dealer for
service. See “Service 4–Wheel Drive message”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285.
165
Shifting Into Four-Wheel-Drive High or
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High or
AUTO position. This can be done at any speed,
except when shifting from Four-Wheel-Drive
Low, and the indicator light will flash while shifting.
It will remain on when the shift is completed.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel-Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive High
position. This can be done at any speed, except
when shifting from Four-Wheel-Drive Low.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel-Drive Low
When Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehicle
speed should be kept below 45 mph. Extended
high-speed operation in Four-Wheel-Drive
Low may damage or shorten the life of the
drivetrain.
To shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred
method for shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low
is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the
166
Four-Wheel-Drive Low position. You must wait for
the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing and remain on before shifting your
transmission in gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear
before the requested mode indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer
case. To help avoid damaging your vehicle,
always wait for the mode indicator lights
to stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit
significant engagement noise and bump
when shifting between Four-Wheel-Drive
Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High ranges or
from NEUTRAL with the engine running.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive
Low position when your vehicle is in gear and/or
moving, the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator
light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete
the shift unless your vehicle is moving less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is
in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the transfer
case will shift to Four-Wheel-Drive High mode.
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Low
to Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO or
Two-Wheel-Drive High, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h)
with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and
the ignition in RUN. The preferred method for
shifting out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive High position.
You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive High indicator light
to stop flashing and remain on before shifting your
transmission into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear
before the requested mode indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer
case. To help avoid damaging your vehicle,
always wait for the mode indicator lights
to stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit
significant engagement noise and bump
when shifting between Four-Wheel-Drive
Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High ranges or
from NEUTRAL with the engine running.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
AUTO, or Two-Wheel-Drive High switch position
when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive
High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will
not complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in
NEUTRAL (N).
Shifting into NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the
following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal. See Parking Brake on page 169
for more information.
167
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel
Drive High.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise
to NEUTRAL till it stops and hold it for
10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial
to the four low position. The NEUTRAL light
will come on when the transfer case shift
to NEUTRAL is complete.
7. If the engine is running, make sure that the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N) by shifting
the transmission to REVERSE (R) for
one second, then shift the transmission
to DRIVE (D) for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, which will
turn the engine off.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving
the vehicle.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
168
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and
turn the ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Turn the transfer case dial to Two-Wheel-Drive
High, Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO.
After the transfer case has shifted out of
NEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out.
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear
before the requested mode indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer
case. To help avoid damaging your vehicle,
always wait for the mode indicator lights
to stop flashing before shifting the
transmission into gear.
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to
the desired position.
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot. Push down
the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime sounds and the warning light flashes
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 5 mph (8 km/h).
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is
released, the brake system warning light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on
can overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is off
before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any
hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 449.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of
the lever, with the parking brake symbol and
located above the parking brake pedal.
169
Shifting Into Park (P)
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. With four-wheel
drive, if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL,
your vehicle will be free to roll, even if
your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
CAUTION:
170
(Continued)
(Continued)
sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL. If you are pulling
a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 449.
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 169 for more
information.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P)
position by pulling the shift lever toward
you and moving it up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle
could move suddenly if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the parking
brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive and your
transfer case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle
will be free to roll, even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P). So be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the
engine running, it could overheat and
even catch fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave your vehicle with
the engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)
and the parking brake is firmly set before
you leave it. After you move the shift lever into
PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.
Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called
torque lock. To prevent torque lock, set the parking
brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before
you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see
Shifting Into Park (P) on page 170.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever
out of PARK (P) before you release the parking
brake.
171
If torque lock does occur, you may need to
have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, then you will be able to
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Parking Over Things That Burn
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift
lock control system which locks the shift lever
in PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCK.
Apply your regular brakes before shifting
from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 146.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way
up into PARK (P) as the brake application is
maintained. Move the shift lever into another gear.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
172
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION:
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system
has been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
(Continued)
173
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running.
But if you ever have to, here are some things
to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 173.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is
at the highest setting. One place this
can happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 422.
174
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer
case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to
roll, even if the shift lever is in PARK (P).
So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL. Always set the
parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on
page 170.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 449.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on,
the automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper
level to minimize glare from lights behind you
after dark.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right
corner of the mirror face that shows the compass
reading and the outside temperature.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System on
page 185 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Pull or push the tab under the inside rearview
mirror to adjust it to the night or daytime setting.
In the nighttime setting, the glare from headlamps
behind the vehicle will be less intense.
175
Temperature and Compass Display
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press the on/off button, located to the far
left, briefly to turn the compass/temperature
display on or off.
The automatic dimming mirror comes on each
time the ignition is turned to start. To turn the
automatic dimming feature off or back on, press the
on/off button. The indicator light on the mirror is lit
when the automatic dimming feature is on.
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to
be calibrated. For more information, see “Compass
Calibration” following.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for
approximately four seconds until either
a flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display
to the desired unit of measurement. After
approximately four seconds of inactivity,
the new unit will be locked in and the
compass/temperature display will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed
for an extended period of time, see your
dealer/retailer. Under certain circumstances, a
delay in updating the temperature is normal.
176
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• After approximately five seconds, the display
does not show a compass heading, N for
North, for example, there may be a strong
magnetic field interfering with the compass.
Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note
pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct
heading and the compass zone variance
is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,
push the on/off button for approximately
12 seconds or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until
the display reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving
the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the
compass to compensate for compass variance
if the vehicle is outside of zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust
for compass variance. Compass variance is
the difference between earth’s magnetic north
and true geographic north. If not adjusted to
account for compass variance, the compass
could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and
a zone number appears in the display. The
compass is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the
desired zone number appears in the display.
Release the button. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new zone
number will be locked in and the compass/
temperature display will return.
177
Cleaning the Mirror
Temperature Display
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or
similar material dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror
as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
The temperature can be displayed by pressing
the compass/temperature button. Pressing the
compass/temperature button once briefly, will
toggle the display reading on and off. To alternate
the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and
Celsius, press and hold the compass/temperature
button for approximately three seconds until
the display blinks F and C. After approximately
five seconds of inactivity, the display will stop
blinking and display the last selection made.
Your vehicle may have this mirror. When on, an
automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper
level to minimize glare from lights behind you after
dark.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed
for an extended period of time, see your dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the
upper right corner of the mirror with the compass
reading and the outside temperature.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Yb: Briefly press this button to turn the display
on or off.
178
O On/Off: Press this button to turn the automatic
dimming feature on or off. The indicator light to
the left of the button will turn on to indicate when
the feature is on. Once the mirror is turned off,
it will remain off until it is turned back on, or until
the vehicle is restarted.
Compass Operation
Cleaning the Mirror
Press the compass/temperature button once
briefly to turn the display on or off.
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid
cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Compass Calibration
See “Compass Calibration” under Automatic
Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compass
and Temperature Display on page 175 for more
information.
Compass Variance
See “Compass Variance” under Automatic
Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compass
and Temperature Display on page 175 for more
information.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see
the side of your vehicle and have a clear view of
objects behind you. The mirrors can be folded
in to enter narrow areas.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and
add-on convex mirror attachments may adversely
affect mirror performance.
179
Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors
These mirrors can be manually folded forward
or rearward. The lower portion of the mirror
is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved
so you can see more from the driver’s seat.
The convex mirror can be adjusted manually to
the driver’s preferred position for better vision.
Your vehicle may have outside heated mirrors
which help clear them of condensation, snow,
and ice. When the rear window defogger button
is pressed, the heated mirrors are also turned on.
Only the upper glass of the mirror is heated.
The lower convex part of the mirror is not heated.
If your vehicle has trailer towing type mirrors, they
can be adjusted so you can have a clear view
of the objects behind you. Manually pull out
the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.
180
Your mirror may also have a turn signal arrow
that will flash in the direction of the turn or
lane change.
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle is
equipped with outside
power mirrors, the
controls are located
on the driver’s
door armrest.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the
four-way control pad to adjust the mirror.
Press (A) again to deselect the mirror.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side
mirror. Then press the arrows located on the
four-way control pad to adjust the mirror.
Press (B) again to deselect the mirror.
Manual Folding
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to
prevent damage when going through an automatic
car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,
push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to
their original unfolded position before driving.
Heated Mirrors
The button to turn the heated mirrors on or off
is located on the climate control panel. Press
this button to warm the driver’s and passenger’s
outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of
ice, snow, and condensation.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on page 244
for more information.
This mirror has the following features.
181
Convex Mirror
The passenger’s side mirror may have convex
glass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more
can be seen from the driver’s seat.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
182
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
If your vehicle is
equipped with outside
power foldaway mirrors,
the controls are located
on the driver’s door
armrest.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again
to deselect the mirror.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again
to deselect the mirror.
• Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded
manually, they may shake or flutter at normal
driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded
position. If this happens, you will need to reset the
mirrors. See “Resetting the Power Foldaway
Mirrors” next.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors
if the following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded
position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and
unfold them one time using the mirror controls.
This will reset them to their normal position.
Automatic Dimming
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare
of the headlamps behind you. See Automatic
Dimming Rearview Mirror with OnStar®, Compass
and Temperature Display on page 175.
Curb View Assist
If your vehicle has the memory package, the
outside mirrors are able to perform the curb
view assist mirror function. This feature may
be useful in allowing the driver to view the curb
when parallel parking. This feature will cause
the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to
a preselected position when the vehicle is
in REVERSE (R).
The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will
return to its original position when the vehicle
is shifted out of REVERSE (R), or the ignition is
turned off or to LOCK.
This feature can be turned on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 273.
This mirror has the following features.
183
Heated Mirrors
The button to turn the heated mirrors on or off is
located on the climate control panel. Press
this button to warm the driver’s and passenger’s
outside rearview mirrors to help clear them of
ice, snow, and condensation.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on page 244
for more information.
Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror may have convex
glass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more
can be seen from the driver’s seat.
Your vehicle may also have a turn signal indicator
on the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash
in the direction of the turn or lane change.
184
OnStar® System
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range
of safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal
to unlock your doors. If you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and
they can contact Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancel
your OnStar® service at any time by contacting
OnStar®. A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and
the OnStar® Terms and Conditions are included in
the vehicle’s OnStar® Subscriber glove box
literature. For more information, visit onstar.com or
onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press
the OnStar® button to speak with an OnStar®
advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in
your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is
included for one year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.
For more information, press the OnStar® button
to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar®.
185
Available Services with
Safe & Sound® Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
(AACN) (If equipped)
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
186
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is
fully integrated into the vehicle, and can be
used with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a
Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak
with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the
OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on
page 372 for more information.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used
to dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to
dial phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
How OnStar® Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The
vehicle information usually includes your GPS
location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the accident that your vehicle
has been involved in (e.g. the direction from
which your vehicle was hit). When you use the
Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS
location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar® service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar® has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
187
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available
in that place as well.
Universal Home Remote
System
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
System Identification
Your vehicle may have a Universal Home Remote
System.
Determine which Universal Home Remote your
vehicle has and then read the pages following
for instructions on programming your specific
system.
Your Responsibility
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the light
appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®
equipment is active.
188
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator light above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions under
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With One Triangular LED).
If there are three round LED indicator lights above
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED).
For help or information on the Universal Home
Remote System, call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer Assistance Offices
on page 656.
Universal Home Remote System
The Universal Home Remote System provides
a way to replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
189
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator light above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling
codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to
complete the programming of your Universal Home
Remote Transmitter.
190
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the Universal Home Remote. Because
of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have
another person available to assist you in the
programming steps
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also recommended that
upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed
Universal Home Remote buttons should be erased
for security purposes. See “Erasing Universal
Home Remote Buttons” later in section.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or
gate operator you are programming.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
To program up to three devices:
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when
the Universal Home Remote indicator light
begins to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold
down the buttons for longer than 30 seconds
and do not repeat this step to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from
the Universal Home Remote buttons
while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. At the same time, press and hold both the
desired Universal Home Remote button and
the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote
successfully receives the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all
of the programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant
light, continue with Steps 6 through 8 following
to complete the programming of a rolling-code
device, most commonly, a garage door
opener.
191
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button
for two seconds, then release it. Immediately
press and hold the same button a second time
for two seconds, then release it. Immediately,
press and hold the same button a third time for
two seconds, then release.
The Universal Home Remote should now
activate the rolling-code device.
To program the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal Home Remote
buttons.
192
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in
the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
Remote button while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
button until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to complete.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Remote button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on while the signal
is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal
Home Remote buttons:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in
this section.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button
previously trained:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with
Step 2 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.
For help or information on the Universal Home
Remote System, call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer Assistance Offices
on page 656.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they
can be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.
193
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming
the transmitter.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Remote System. If there are three round Light
Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow
the instructions below.
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as,
for future programming. You only need the
original remote control transmitter for Fixed
Code programming. It is also recommended
that upon the sale or lease termination of the
vehicle, the programmed buttons should be
erased for security purposes. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in
this section.
This system provides a way to replace up to
three remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home automation devices.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or
security device you are programming.
Do not use this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
194
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
To program up to three devices:
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are
Rolling Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat
the procedure.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two
outside buttons at the same time for one to
two seconds, and immediately release them.
195
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and
hold the universal home remote button that
you would like to use to control the garage
door until the garage door moves. The
indicator light, above the selected button,
should slowly blink. You may need to hold
the button from five to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release
the button when the garage door moves.
The indicator light will blink rapidly until
programming is complete.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit and may be a colored
button. Press this button. After you press this
button, you will have 30 seconds to complete
the following steps.
196
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such
as an additional garage door opener, a security
device, or home automation device, repeat Steps 1
through 5, choosing a different function button
in Step 3 than what you used for the garage
door opener.
If these instructions do not work, you probably
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed
Code garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
To program up to three devices:
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are
Fixed Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these
actions, the device will time out and you will
have to repeat the procedure.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener, remove the battery cover on your hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer
of your garage door opener motor. If you see
a row of dip switches similar to the graphic
above, you have a Fixed Code garage door
opener. If you do not see a row of dip switches,
return to the previous section for Programming
Universal Home Remote – Rolling Code.
197
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
Your panel of switches may not appear
exactly as they do in the examples above,
but they should be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held
transmitter may be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled
as “Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be
labeled as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position may be
labeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
198
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings
from left to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position,
write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes
you enter into the Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings
that you wrote down in Step 2, in order from
left to right, into the Universal Home Remote,
when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press
all three buttons at the same time for about
three seconds. Release the buttons to put
the Universal Home Remote into
programming mode.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two
and one-half minutes to complete Step 4.
Now press one button on the Universal Home
Remote for each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle
button in the vehicle.
199
5. After entering all of the switch positions,
again, firmly press and release all three
buttons at the same time. The indicator lights
will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button you would like
to use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light above
the selected button should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from
five to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,
choosing a different button in Step 6 than what
you used for the garage door opener.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
repeating the instructions.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell or terminate your lease.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on
the Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above
the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
release both buttons. The codes from all
buttons will be erased.
200
For help or information on the Universal Home
Remote System, call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer Assistance Offices
on page 656.
Storage Areas
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have cupholders located on and
behind the center console and in the rear seat
armrest. Pull the loop down on the rear seat
armrest to access the cupholders.
Your vehicle may have a cover on the top of each
bed side. To access the stake pockets below,
you must cut out the square and remove it.
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever.
Pull downward on the lid to use the cupholders
behind the center console.
201
Instrument Panel Storage Area
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle may have an instrument panel
storage area. It is located above the glove box.
Your vehicle may have an upper and lower center
console storage area with cupholders.
To open, press and hold the driver’s side of the
handle in and pull out on the exposed portion
of the handle.
To access the upper storage area, pull lever (A) up.
To access the lower storage area, raise the upper
storage bin, then pull lever (B) up. Use the key to
lock and unlock the lower storage area.
202
Luggage Carrier
The vehicle may have a luggage carrier that can
be used to load things on top of the vehicle.
The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the
roof. It may also have crossrails which can be
moved back and forth to help secure cargo.
Tie the load to the siderails or siderail supports.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage
carrier that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg)
or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle
may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so
that it rests on the slats as far forward
as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity
when loading your vehicle. For more information
on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 428.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while you are
driving, check to make sure the luggage and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof,
cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside
the crossrails and siderails to spread the load.
Tie the plywood to the siderail supports.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail
supports. Use the crossrails only to keep the
load from sliding. To move a crossrail, lift the
release lever, on both sides of the rail, up to
loosen it. Slide the crossrail to the desired
position balancing the force side to side. Press
the release lever on both sides of the rail, down
to tighten it. Try to slide the crossrail back and
forth slightly to be sure it is tight.
• If you need to carry long items, move
the crossrails as far apart as they will go.
Tie the load to the crossrails and the siderails
or siderail supports. Also tie the load to the
bumpers. Do not tie the load so tightly that
the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
locked into the siderail.
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL) located above the rear glass.
203
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle,
care should be taken not to block or damage the
CHMSL unit.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle may have a rear seat armrest
that contains two cupholders. To access the
cupholders, pull the armrest down from the rear
seatback.
Cargo Management System
Your vehicle may have a cargo management
system. It is located in the bed of the truck. The
system contains three rails located on the front and
sides of the bed.
The system will include four adjustable cargo
tie-downs. The tie-downs can be placed on the
upper and lower slides of the rail.
204
To adjust a tie-down, pull the locator pin out and
move the tie-down to another location making
sure the locator pin lines up with a locator hole
on the rail. If the locator pin does not line up with
the locator hole, the tie-down may be installed
incorrectly. Turn it over and reinstall. Once the
pin is inside the hole, the tie-down will not move
side to side. The maximum load for each rail
is 500 lbs (227 kg).
The rails are notched at each end which allows
the tie-downs to be removed and placed on
another rail. To remove, pull the locator pin out
and slide the tie-down to the end of the rail
and pull back.
To remove or install cargo tie-downs at the front of
the bed, slide the corner cap towards the center of
the bed to expose the rail notches. To remove the
corner cap, pull either edge away from the rail.
To remove the system, loosen the toggle bolts
on each rail until they can be removed from
the bed of the truck. To replace the system,
place the toggle bolts and rails into their original
locations and tighten them to a torque setting
of 12.5 ft-lbs (17Y).
If the system is removed to install a bed liner,
make sure there is no bed liner material in
the installation points.
Notice: If you tie down cargo using the
horizontal slots on the top of the pickup box,
you may damage the box. Using the horizontal
slots on the top of the pickup box for tie-down
locations may cause damage to the pickup box
and would not be covered by your warranty.
Only use the tie-down loops if you do not have
the cargo management system.
Sunroof
If your vehicle has a power sliding sunroof,
the ignition needs to be turned to RUN, or the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be
activated to open or close the sunroof. When RAP
is active, the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned off, or until the driver’s door is
opened. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 141 for more information.
205
Extended Cab
Close: From the vent, or open position, press and
hold the front of the switch to close the sunroof.
If your vehicle is an
extended-cab, the
sunroof switch is located
on the headliner above
the rearview mirror.
The sunroof also has a roller sunshade that can
be used to block the rays of the sun. The roller
sunshade can be manually operated with the
sunroof in an open or closed position. To open the
sunshade, press and unlatch it, and roll it back.
To close, pull it forward and latch it into the closed
position.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract
when the sunroof is closed.
Vent: From the closed position, press and hold the
rear of the switch to vent the sunroof. To close the
sunroof, press and hold the front of the switch.
Open: From the vent position, the sunroof can
be fully opened either manually or by using the
express-open feature. To open manually, press the
rear of the switch to the first depression and hold
until the sunroof has reached the desired position.
To open using express-open, press the rear of the
switch fully and release. The sunroof will move to
the full open position. To stop the sunroof partway,
press the switch a second time.
206
Crew Cab
If your vehicle is a
crew cab, there are
two sunroof switches
located in the overhead
console above the
rearview mirror.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open
the sunroof, fully press and release the rear of
the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will open
automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press
the switch a second time. To express-close the
sunroof, fully press and release the front of the
driver’s side switch. The sunroof will close
automatically. To stop the sunroof partway,
press the switch a second time.
The sunroof also has a sunshade which you can
pull forward to block sun rays. The sunshade must
be opened and closed manually.
Vent: From the closed position, press the rear of
the passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof.
To close the sunroof, press and hold the front
of the passenger’s side switch.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the
sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver’s
side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired
position. To close the sunroof, press and hold the
front of the driver’s side switch until the sunroof
reaches the desired position.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract
when the sunroof is closed.
Anti-Pinch Feature (Crew Cab Only): If an object
is in the path of the sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop the
sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction.
The sunroof will then open halfway, and the air
deflector will raise. To close the sunroof once it
has re-opened, refer to the Express-Close or
Manual-Close functions described previously.
If the sunroof is in the vent position, and there is
an object in the path of the sunroof when it closing,
the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and
stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof once it
has re-opened, refer to the Manual-Close or
Express-Close functions described previously.
207
✍ NOTES
208
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 212
Instrument Panel Overview
(Base/Uplevel version) ............................ 212
Instrument Panel Overview
(Premium version) .................................. 215
Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 217
Other Warning Devices ............................. 217
Horn .......................................................... 217
Tilt Wheel .................................................. 218
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 218
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 219
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 220
Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 220
Windshield Wipers ..................................... 221
Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................... 222
Windshield Washer .................................... 223
Cruise Control ........................................... 224
Exterior Lamps .......................................... 227
Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 228
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 228
Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 229
Puddle Lamps ........................................... 230
Fog Lamps ................................................ 230
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .................... 231
Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 231
Dome Lamps ............................................. 232
Dome Lamp Override ................................ 232
Entry Lighting ............................................ 232
Exit Lighting .............................................. 232
Reading Lamps ......................................... 232
Cargo Lamp .............................................. 233
Electric Power Management ...................... 233
Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 234
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ...... 234
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 238
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 239
Climate Controls ......................................... 240
Climate Control System
(With Air Conditioning) ........................... 240
Climate Control System (Heater Only) ....... 243
Dual Automatic Climate Control System .... 244
Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 251
209
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 252
Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 253
Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 254
Trip Odometer ........................................... 254
Tachometer ............................................... 254
Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 255
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
(1500 Series) ......................................... 255
Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 256
Airbag Off Light ......................................... 256
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 258
Charging System Light .............................. 260
Voltmeter Gage ......................................... 261
Brake System Warning Light ..................... 262
Antilock Brake System Warning Light ........ 263
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 264
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 264
Tire Pressure Light .................................... 265
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 266
210
Oil Pressure Gage ..................................... 269
Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 270
Security Light ............................................ 270
Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 271
Cruise Control Light .................................. 271
Highbeam On Light ................................... 271
Four-Wheel-Drive Light .............................. 271
Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................ 272
Fuel Gage ................................................. 272
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 273
Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 273
DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons) ................................. 274
DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons) ............................ 281
DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 285
DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons) ................................. 295
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Audio System(s) ......................................... 306
Setting the Time ........................................ 307
AM-FM Radio ............................................ 310
Radio with CD (Base) ............................... 312
Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 318
Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) ................. 328
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player) ............................... 345
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player) ........................................... 351
XM Radio Messages ................................. 357
Navigation/Radio System ........................... 359
Rear Seat Entertainment System ............... 359
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................. 370
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 372
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 372
Radio Reception ........................................ 373
Care of Your CDs and DVDs .................... 374
Care of the CD and DVD Player ............... 375
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 375
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 375
211
Instrument Panel Overview
Instrument Panel Overview (Base/Uplevel version)
212
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on
page 251.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 218.
C. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 273.
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 217.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 253.
F. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 146. Tow/Haul Selector
Button (If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode on
page 152. Range Selection Mode (Allison
Transmission® and Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
Button (If Equipped). See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 146.
G. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 306.
H. Instrument Panel Storage Area. See Instrument
Panel Storage Area on page 202.
I. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If
Equipped). See Towing a Trailer on page 449.
J. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lamps
on page 227.
K. Hood Release. See Hood Release on
page 504.
L. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on
page 169.
M. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp
Override on page 232. Dome Lamp Knob.
See Dome Lamps on page 232. Fog Lamp
Button (If Equipped). See Fog Lamps on
page 230.
N. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control on
page 224.
O. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 218.
P. Horn. See Horn on page 217.
Q. Automatic Transfer Case Control (If Equipped).
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 154.
213
R. Ashtray (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 239.
S. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped). See
StabiliTrak® System on page 385. Ultrasonic
Rear Park Assist Disable Button (If Equipped).
See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
on page 234. Pedal Adjust Button (If Equipped).
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on
page 143. Heated Windshield Washer
Fluid Button (If Equipped). Windshield Washer
on page 223.
T. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 238.
214
U. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System (With Air Conditioning ) on page 240 or
Climate Control System (Heater Only) on
page 243 and Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 244.
V. Power Take Off (PTO) Control (If Equipped).
See Power Take Off (PTO) in the
DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement Index.
W. Passenger Airbag Off Control (If Equipped).
See Airbag Off Switch on page 100.
X. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 201.
Instrument Panel Overview (Premium version)
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on
page 251.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 218.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument
Panel Cluster on page 253.
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 217.
215
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 146.
F. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped). See
Tow/Haul Mode on page 152.
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 273.
H. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on
page 306.
I. Exterior Lamps Control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 227.
J. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If
Equipped). See Towing a Trailer on page 449.
K. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome
Lamp Override on page 232. Dome Lamp
Knob. See Dome Lamps on page 232.
L. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped).
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 154.
M. Hood Release. See Hood Release on
page 504.
N. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake on
page 169.
O. Cruise Control Buttons. See Cruise Control on
page 224.
P. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 218.
216
Q. Horn. See Horn on page 217.
R. Audio Steering Wheel Controls. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 372.
S. Climate Controls. See Climate Control System
(With Air Conditioning ) on page 240 or
Climate Control System (Heater Only) on
page 243 or Dual Automatic Climate Controls
(If Equipped). See Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 244.
T. Accessory Power Outlets. See Accessory
Power Outlet(s) on page 238. Cigarette Lighter
(If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Lighter on page 239.
U. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped). See
StabiliTrak® System on page 385. Pedal Adjust
Button (If Equipped). See Adjustable Throttle
and Brake Pedal on page 143. Rear Park Assist
Disable Button (If Equipped). See Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 234.
Heated Windshield Washer Fluid Button
(If Equipped). See Windshield Washer on
page 223.
V. Passenger Airbag Off Control (If Equipped).
See Airbag Off Switch on page 100.
W. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 201.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
The hazard warning flashers warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them
up at the side of the road about 300 feet
(100 m) behind your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is
located on top of the
steering column.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols
located on the steering wheel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
ignition position the key is in, and even if the
key is not in the ignition.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your
vehicle’s turn signals will not work.
217
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The tilt wheel lets you adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. Raise it to the highest level
to give your legs more room when exiting
or entering the vehicle.
The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the
lower left side of the steering column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull
the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a
comfortable position and release the lever to lock
the wheel in place.
218
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See
Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page 219.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 220.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 220.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers
on page 221.
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield
Washer on page 223.
For information on the exterior lamps, see Exterior
Lamps on page 227.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
for less than one second until the arrow starts
to flash. This will cause the turn signals to
automatically flash three times. It will flash
six times if tow-haul mode is active. Holding the
turn signal lever for more than one second
will cause the turn signals to flash until you
release the lever. The lever will return by itself
when it is released.
An arrow on the
instrument panel
cluster will flash in the
direction of the turn
or lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the
arrows flash more quickly than normal, a signal
bulb may be burned out and other drivers will not
see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when
you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a
blown fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 618.
219
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a
mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash
of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL
ON will also appear in the Driver Information
Control (DIC). To turn the chime and message off,
move the turn signal lever to the off position.
This feature lets you use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that
you want to pass. It works even if your headlamps
are in the automatic position.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or
on low beam, your high-beam headlamps will
turn on. They will stay on as long as you hold the
lever toward you. The high-beam indicator on
the instrument panel cluster will come on. Release
the lever to return to normal operation.
53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam
Changer): To change the headlamps from low to
high beam, push the lever toward the instrument
panel. To return to low-beam headlamps, pull
the multifunction lever toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams
are on, this indicator light
on the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
220
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,
then release it.
Windshield Wipers
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper
blades may not clear the windshield well, making
it harder to see and drive safely. If the blades
do become damaged, install new blades or blade
inserts. For more information, see Windshield
Wiper Blade Replacement on page 557.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single
wiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start.
Then let go. The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold
the band on mist longer, for more wipe cycles.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
6 (Delay):
Turn the band to adjust the delay time.
The delay between wiping cycles becomes
shorter as the band is moved to the top of the
lever. This can be very useful in light rain or snow.
6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away from
you to the first solid band past the delay settings,
for steady wiping at low speed.
? (High Speed): Turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings, for
high-speed wiping.
221
Rainsense™ II Wipers
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshield
wipers, the moisture sensor is located next to the
inside rearview mirror and is mounted on the
windshield. When active, these sensors are able
to detect moisture on the windshield and
automatically turn on the wipers.
To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers
must be set to one of the five delay settings on the
multifunction lever. Each of the five settings
adjusts the sensitivity of the rainsensor.
Since different drivers have different setting
preferences, it is recommended that the mid-range
setting (position 3) be used initially. For more
wipes, select the higher settings; for fewer wipes,
select the lower settings located closer to the
off position on the multifunction lever.
222
The rainsensor will automatically control the
frequency of the wipes from the off setting to the
high speed setting according to the weather
conditions. The wipers can be left in a rainsense
mode even when it is not raining.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will
turn on automatically if the exterior lamp control is
in the AUTO position.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash
with the wipers on can damage them. Turn
the wipers off when going through an
automatic car wash.
Windshield Washer
The button is located in
the switchbank under
the climate controls.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked
with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the
multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on the
windshield. The wipers clear the window and then
either stop or return to the preset speed.
Heated Windshield Washer
If your vehicle has the heated windshield washer
fluid system it may be used to help clear ice,
snow, tree sap, or bugs from your windshield.
Push the heated washer fluid button to activate the
heated windshield washer fluid system. The
indicator light will flash. This activation initiates
four heated wash/wipe cycles. The first heated
wash/wipe cycle may take up to 40 seconds to
occur, depending on outside temperature. After the
first wash/wipe cycle, it may take up to 20 seconds
for each of the remaining cycles to begin. Press the
button again to turn off the heated windshield
washer fluid system or it will automatically turn off
after four wipe cycles have been completed.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system
is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam may flow out of the washer
nozzles for a short period of time before washer
fluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.
223
Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, cruise control
is turned off.
224
If your vehicle has an Allison® automatic
transmission, see “Grade Braking and Cruise
Grade Braking (Allison Transmission®) under
Tow/Haul Mode on page 152 for an explanation of
how cruise control interacts with the Range
Selection Mode, tow/haul and grade braking
systems.
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak®™ system and
begins to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise
control, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. See StabiliTrak® System on page 385.
When road conditions allow you to safely use it
again, you may turn the cruise control back on.
The cruise control
buttons are located on
left side of the
steering wheel.
T (On/Off): This button can both activate and
turn off the system. The indicator light is on
when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise
control is off.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to
a previously set speed.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press this button to set the
speed or make the vehicle decelerate.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do not
want to. You could be startled and even
lose control. Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise control.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise
control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is
set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on after the cruise control
has been set to the desired speed.
1. Press the cruise control On/Off button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
Resuming a Set Speed
If you apply the brakes while the cruise control is
set, the cruise control is disengaged. But it
does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle will go back to the
previous set speed and stay there.
225
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
To increase the cruise speed while using
cruise control:
• Press and hold the +RES button on the
steering wheel until you reach your new
desired speed, then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is
done, the vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal,
the vehicle will slow down to the previous
set cruise speed.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
To reduce the vehicle speed while using
cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the
steering wheel until the desired lower speed is
reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press
the SET– button on the steering wheel
briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle will
go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
226
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills
depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills. While going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the accelerator
pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. While going
downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. Of
course, applying the brake turns off the cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much
trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
• Press the cancel button on the steering wheel.
• Press the On/Off button on the
steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
When the cruise control or the ignition is turned
off, the cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps
control is located on
the instrument panel
to the left of the
steering wheel.
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Taillamps
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
O (Off): Turn the control to this position to turn
off the automatic headlamps and daytime
running lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control
to the off position again to turn the automatic
headlamps or DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position
will only work when the vehicle is shifted into
PARK (P).
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this
position to automatically turn on the headlamps at
normal brightness, together with the following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps
are in AUTO, the headlamps may automatically
remain on for a set time. The time of the delay can
be changed using the DIC. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 273.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this
position to turn on the parking lamps together with
the following:
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
227
2 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the headlamps together with the
following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
Headlamps on Reminder
When the headlamps are turned on while the
vehicle is on, the headlamps turn off automatically
10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. When
the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle
is off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes
before automatically turning off to prevent the
battery from being drained. Turn the headlamp
control to off and then back to the headlamp
on position to make the headlamps stay on for an
additional 10 minutes.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during
the day. DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, but they can be especially
helpful in the short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional DRL are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
Push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to change the headlamps
from low beam to high beam.
228
A reminder chime will sound when the headlamps
or parking lamps are manually turned on and
your ignition is off and a door is open. To disable
the chime, turn the light off.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The engine is running.
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps are
on. The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps are
not on. The instrument panel is not lit up either.
The automatic system could also come on while
driving through a parking garage, tunnel, or in
heavy overcast weather. This is normal.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system switches from DRL to the headlamps.
There is a delay in the transition between the
daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
headlamp system so that driving under bridges or
bright overhead street lights does not affect the
system. The DRL and automatic headlamp system
are only affected when the light sensor detects
a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay.
When the headlamp switch is turned off, the
headlamps go off.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic
headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the
normal brightness, along with the taillamps,
sidemarker, parking lamps, and the instrument
panel lights. The radio back lighting is also dimly lit.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn
the exterior lamps switch to the off position.
Turning off the automatic headlamp system with
the headlamp switch is not available for vehicles
first sold in Canada.
Your vehicle has a light sensor located on the top
of the instrument panel in the defroster grille
that regulates when the automatic headlamps turn
on. Be sure it is not covered, or the headlamps
will come on whenever the ignition is on.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system comes on
immediately. Once you leave the garage, it takes
approximately one minute for the automatic
headlamp system to change to DRL if it is bright
enough outside. During that delay, the instrument
panel cluster might not be as bright as usual.
Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 231.
229
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, turn the control to the off position.
Fog Lamps
You might be able to turn off your Automatic
Headlamp System. See Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) on page 228 for more information.
- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,
The headlamps can also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. This feature can be programmed using
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 295.
The regular headlamp system can be turned on
when needed.
Puddle Lamps
Your vehicle has puddle lamps, located at the
bottom of the front doors. The puddle lamps come
on when a door is opened, or when the unlock
button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Transmitter is pressed. The lamps time out or turn
off once the engine is started.
the button is located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column and below the
dome lamp override button.
The ignition must be in RUN and the parking
lamps must be on for the fog lamps to work.
To turn the fog lamps on, press the fog lamps
button. A light comes on in the instrument
panel cluster to let you know that the fog lamps
are on. Press the button again to turn the fog
lamps off.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the low-beam
headlamps automatically turn on.
The fog lamps turn off while you change to
high-beam headlamps. When the high-beam
headlamps go off, the fog lamps will come
on again.
Fog lamps should only be used in foggy conditions
since they could be distracting to oncoming
drivers in clear weather conditions.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
230
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp
If your vehicle has this feature, this button includes
wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified
service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
This button is located
on the overhead
console.
For further information on roof mount emergency
lamp installation, please visit the GM Upfitter
website at www.gmupfitters.com or contact
your dealer.
If your vehicle has this button, your vehicle may
have the snow plow prep package. For further
information see Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment on page 435.
Instrument Panel Brightness
When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the
button will activate the lamp and illuminate an
indicator light at the bottom of this button. Pressing
the top of the button will turn off the roof mounted
lamp and indicator.
The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at
30 amps, so the total current draw of the
attached lamps should be less than this value.
The attachment points for the roof lamp circuits are
two blunt cut wires located above the overhead
console, a dark green switched power wire and a
black ground wire.
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This
feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
The knob for this feature is located next to the
headlamp control.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Turn the knob clockwise to return the instrument
panel cluster or radio display to full brightness
when the headlamps or parking lamps are on. To
turn on the dome lamps, turn the knob to the
farthest clockwise position.
231
Dome Lamps
Entry Lighting
The dome lamps come on when any door is
opened. They turn off after all the doors are closed.
Your vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning
the knob, located next to the exterior lamps
control, clockwise to the farthest position. In this
position, the dome lamps will remain on whether a
door is opened or closed.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located next to
the exterior lamps control.
The dome lamp override is used to set the dome
lamps to remain off or come on automatically
when a door is opened.
E (Dome Lamp Override): Press the button in
and the dome lamps remain off when a door
is opened. Press the button again to return it to
the extended position so that the dome lamps
come on when a door is opened.
232
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will
come on if the dome override button is in the
extended position. If the dome override button is
pressed in, the lamps will not come on.
Exit Lighting
The interior lamps come on when the key is
removed from the ignition. They turn off
automatically in 20 seconds. The lights do not
come on if the dome override button is pressed in.
Reading Lamps
If your vehicle has reading lamps they are located
on the overhead console.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button
located next to each lamp. To turn them off, press
the button again.
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in
other locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press
the button located next to the lamp.
If your vehicle has a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system, press the lamp lenses to turn the
lamps on or off.
The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamps come on by turning the
instrument panel brightness control knob to the
farthest clockwise position. This knob is located on
the instrument panel and also turns on the
dome lamps.
The cargo lamp can be used if more light is
needed in the cargo area of the vehicle or in the
top-box storage units.
Electric Power Management
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you
may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the
electrical loads are very high. This is true for all
vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)
may not be spinning fast enough at idle to
produce all the power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
233
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It
can increase engine idle speed to generate more
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action, this action may
be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver
Information Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or Service
Battery Charging System. If this message is
displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome and reading
lamps, if they are left on for more than 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. The cargo lamp
shuts off after 20 minutes. This prevents the
battery from running down.
234
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system it is designed to help
you park while in REVERSE (R). It operates only
at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). URPA
helps make parking easier and helps you avoid
colliding with objects such as parked vehicles. The
URPA system detects objects that are close to
the rear of the vehicle which are at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or
trunk level. The system detects objects up to
8 feet (2.5 m) behind your vehicle. The URPA
sensors determine how close these objects
are from your bumper within this area.
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
URPA does not:
• Operate above speeds of
5 mph (8 km/h).
• Detect objects more than 8 feet
(2.5 meters) behind the vehicle. This
distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather.
• Detect objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the vehicle, or
that are very close to the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
So if you do not use proper care before
backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child,
pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death. Even
though the vehicle has the URPA system,
always check carefully before backing up
by checking behind your vehicle.
The URPA display is
located near the
passenger side rear
window and can
be seen by looking over
your right shoulder.
The URPA display has three color-coded lights.
The lights are used to provide distance and system
information, along with beeps that will be heard
through the speakers.
URPA can be turned off
by pressing the rear
park aid disable button
located below the
climate control system.
The indicator light will come on to indicate that
URPA is off.
235
The red light in the URPA display will also be lit if
the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). If the vehicle has a
Driver Information Center (DIC), PARK ASSIST
OFF will display on the screen. URPA automatically
turns back on each time the vehicle is started.
How the System Works
When the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R),
the rear display will briefly come on to let you
know the display is operating correctly. URPA
comes on automatically when the shift lever
is moved into REVERSE (R).
The system does not work at a reverse speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this,
the red light on the rear display will flash.
How the System Works when Backing
If the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPA detects
objects close to the rear bumper. The first time an
object is detected a single beep will sound.
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph (8 km/h), the
following describes what will occur based on your
distance to a detected object located behind the
vehicle:
• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and
8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will come on.
• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and
40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on.
• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and
23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/
amber/red) will be on.
• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), a
beeping sound will repeat for a short time and
all three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash.
Notice: If you use URPA while the tailgate is
lowered, it may not detect an object behind your
vehicle, and you might back into the object and
damage your vehicle. Always verify the tailgate
is closed when using URPA or turn off URPA
when driving with the tailgate lowered.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above
tailgate level. In order for the rear sensors to
recognize an object, it must be within detection
range behind the vehicle.
236
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a
temporary condition, the message PARK ASSIST
OFF will be displayed on the DIC screen and a
red light will come on the URPA display when the
shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). This
occurs under the following conditions:
• The driver disables the system.
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a
bicycle or an object was hanging out of your
trunk during your last drive when you turned off
the vehicle. If the attached objects are removed
from your vehicle before the start of your next
drive, the system will return to normal operation
unless an object is detected when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R). If this occurs, URPA
assumes the object is still attached, so you will
have to wait until the vehicle is driven forward
above 15 mph (25 km/h) before URPA will
return to normal operation.
• A trailer ball hitch is attached to your vehicle.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not kept clean. So,
be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumper free
of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on
page 611. If the DIC still displays the PARK
ASSIST OFF message after cleaning the
bumper and driving forward at a speed of at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), see your dealer.
• Other conditions that may affect system
performance include vibrations from a
jackhammer or the compression of air brakes
on a very large truck or other mechanical
devices that interfere with URPA performance.
• When URPA is disabled without driver action
and the driver attempts to turn URPA back on
by pressing the rear park aid button, the
indicator light will flash for 3 seconds and then
stay lit to indicate that URPA is off.
As always, drivers should use care when backing
up a vehicle. Always look behind you, being
sure to check for other vehicles, obstructions and
blind spots.
237
For Driver Information Center messages related to
URPA, see DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 285.
If the vehicle bumper is damaged, the URPA
system may not work properly. Take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located below the climate control system, or may
have one accessory power outlet and one cigarette
lighter. The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in
the receptacle closest to the driver. There may be
another accessory power outlet in the rear cargo
area. If the vehicle has a floor console, there is an
outlet inside the storage bin and one on the rear of
the floor console.
238
To use an outlet, remove the protective cap.
When not in use, always cover the outlet with the
protective cap. The accessory power outlet is
operational at all times.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged
in for an extended period of time while the
vehicle is off will drain the battery. Power is
always supplied to the outlets. Always unplug
electrical equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that exceeds
the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be
compatible to the accessory power outlet and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your dealer
for additional information on the accessory
power plugs.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should. The
repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the proper installation instructions included
with the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have a front ashtray located near
the center of the instrument panel. Pull on the door
to open it. The ashtray may have a cigarette lighter.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other
flammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes
or other smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage your vehicle. Never
put flammable items in the ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, open the door and pull the
ashtray bin toward you. To replace the ashtray,
insert the ashtray bin inside the ashtray door and
press down until it engages. To use the cigarette
lighter, push it in all the way, and let go. When it is
ready for use, the lighter pops back out.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating does not let the lighter back
away from the heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can occur to the
lighter or heating element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating.
239
Climate Controls
Climate Control System (With Air
Conditioning)
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
Use the right knob to select from the
following modes:
The right knob can be positioned between
two modes to select a combination of those
two modes.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets and half to the
floor outlets.
Operation
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise
to turn the front system off.
240
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets with some air directed to the
windshield and side window outlets. In this mode,
the system will automatically select outside air.
Recirculation cannot be selected in floor mode.
The right knob may also be used to select the
defrost and defog mode. For more information, see
“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.
: (Outside Air): Press this button to turn the
outside air mode on. When the button is
pressed, an indicator light will come on. When this
mode is on, outside air will circulate throughout
the vehicle. The outside air mode can be used with
all modes, but it cannot be used with the
recirculation mode.
? (Recirculation): Press this button to turn
the recirculation mode on. When the button
is pressed, an indicator light will come on.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the
vehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air and
prevent odors from entering the vehicle.
Recirculation may also help cool the air inside the
vehicle more quickly once the temperature
inside the vehicle is less than the outside
temperature.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defog or defrost modes. If recirculation is
selected with one of these modes, the indicator
light will flash three times and then turn off. While
in recirculation mode the windows may fog
when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the
fog, select either the defog or defrost mode
and increase the fan speed.
The recirculation mode can be turned off by
pressing the outside air button, or by turning off
the ignition.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air conditioning system on or off. When this
button is pressed, an indicator light on the button
will come on to let you know the air conditioning is
activated. The air conditioning can be selected in
any mode as long as the fan switch is on.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath your
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog or frost on the inside of windows is a result of
high humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly. To avoid fogging
windows on rainy and humid days at temperatures
above freezing, run the air conditioning
compressor. It is best to avoid the use of the
recirculation mode, except when maximum A/C
performance is needed or for short times to avoid
exterior odors.
241
Turn the right knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog
or moisture and warm the passengers. The air
is directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and side
window vents.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. A portion of the
air is directed to the windshield and the side
window vents, with some air directed to the floor
vents. The system will automatically force
outside air into the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected in the
defog or defrost mode. When either mode is
selected, the system runs the air conditioning
compressor, unless the outside temperature
is close to freezing. Do not drive the vehicle until
all the windows are clear.
242
Rear Window Defogger
If your vehicle has a rear window defogger it uses
a warming grid to remove fog from the rear
window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. An indicator light on
the button will come on to let you know that
the rear window defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN. The rear window defogger
will stay on for approximately 10 minutes after the
button is pressed, unless the ignition is turned
to ACC or LOCK. The defogger can also be turned
off by pressing the button again or by turning off
the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.
Climate Control System
(Heater Only)
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the temperature inside the vehicle.
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.
Use the right knob to select from the
following modes:
The right knob can be positioned between
two modes to select a combination of those
two modes.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to
the instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets.
Operation
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise
to turn the front system off.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets with some air directed to the
windshield, side window outlets, and second row
floor outlets. In this mode, the system will
automatically select outside air.
243
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog or frost on the inside of windows is a result of
high humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool
window glass. This can be minimized if the climate
control system is used properly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
Dual Automatic Climate
Control System
With this system, you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle. The vehicle
also has a flow-through ventilation system
described later in this section.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog
or moisture and warm the passengers. The air
is directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and side
window vents.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. A portion of the
air is directed to the windshield and the side
window vents, with some air directed to the floor
vents. The system will automatically force
outside air into the vehicle.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
244
Different climate control settings can be selected
for the driver and passengers.
Driver and Passenger Side
Temperature Controls
The driver and passenger side temperature
buttons are used to adjust the temperature of the
air coming through the system on the driver or
passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature
can be adjusted even if the system is turned
off. This is possible since outside air always flows
through the system as the vehicle is moving
forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See
“Recirculation” later in this section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease
the cabin temperature. The driver side or
passenger side temperature display shows the
temperature setting decreasing or increasing.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by
pressing the PASS button and turning off the
PASS indicator. When the passenger’s
temperature setting is set different than the
driver’s setting, the indicator on the PASS button
illuminates and both the driver’s side and
passenger’s side temperature displays are shown.
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system controls the inside temperature,
the air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display changes
to show the current temperature(s) and
AUTO is lit on the display. The current air
delivery mode and fan speed are also
displayed for about 5 seconds.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet are automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor
may run when the outside temperature
is above freezing. The air inlet will normally be
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air
inlet may automatically switch to the
recirculate mode to help quickly cool down the
air inside the vehicle. The light on the button
comes on in recirculation.
245
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F
(23°C) temperature setting and allow about
20 minutes for the system to regulate. Use the
driver’s or passenger’s temperature buttons to
adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If
you choose the temperature setting of 60°F
(15°C), the system remains at the maximum
cooling setting. If you choose the temperature
setting of 90°F (32°C), the system remains at
the maximum heat setting. Choosing either
maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to
heat or cool any faster.
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off the
climate control system. Outside air still enters the
vehicle, and is directed to the floor. This
direction can be changed by pressing the mode
button. Recirculation can be selected once
you have selected vent or bi-level mode. The
temperature can also be adjusted using either
temperature button. If you adjust the air delivery
mode or temperature settings with the system
off, the display illuminates briefly to show you the
settings and then returns to off. Press the
on/off button or the up down arrows on the fan
switch, the defrost button, AUTO button, or the air
conditioning button to turn the system on when
it is off.
Be careful not to cover the solar sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel near the windshield.
This sensor regulates air temperature based on sun
load. For more information on the solar sensor, see
“Sensors” later in this section.
Manual Operation
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
system delays turning the fan on until warm air is
available. The length of delay depends on the
engine coolant temperature. Pressing the
fan switch overrides this delay and changes the
fan to a selected speed.
DC (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols let
you manually adjust the fan speed. Press D
to increase fan speed and C to decrease
fan speed.
246
You can manually adjust the air delivery mode or
fan speed.
Pressing either fan button while the system is off
turns the system on. Pressing either fan button
while in automatic control places the fan
under manual control. The fan setting remains
displayed and the AUTO light turns off. The
air delivery mode remains under automatic control.
HG (Mode): Press H and G to manually
change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
Repeatedly press either button until the desired
mode appears on the display. Pressing either
mode button while the system is off changes the
air delivery mode without turning the system
on. Pressing either mode button while in automatic
control places the mode under manual control.
The air delivery mode setting is displayed and the
AUTO light turns off. The fan remains under
automatic control.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is directed partly to the
instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. A
little air is directed towards the windshield and
side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some to the windshield, side window outlets,
and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the
system will automatically select outside air.
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later
in this section.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on. When the button is
pressed, an indicator light comes on.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the
vehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air and
prevent odors from entering the vehicle.
Recirculation may also help cool the air inside the
vehicle more quickly once the temperature inside
the vehicle is less than the outside temperature.
247
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defog, or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected
with one of those modes, the indicator light flashes
three times and then turns off. The air conditioning
compressor also comes on when this mode is
activated. While in recirculation mode the windows
may fog when the weather is cold and damp. To
clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost
mode and increase the fan speed.
The recirculation mode can be turned off by
pressing the outside air button, or by turning off
the ignition.
; (Outside Air): Press this button to turn on
the outside air mode. When this mode is selected,
air from outside the vehicle circulates throughout
the vehicle. An indicator light on the button comes
on to let you know that it is activated. The
outside air mode can be used with all modes, but
it cannot be used with the recirculation mode.
Air Conditioning
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and
off. When air conditioning is selected, an indicator
light comes on to let you know that the air
conditioning has been activated.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature
is too cool for air conditioning makes the air
conditioning indicator flash three times and then
turn off to let you know the air conditioning mode is
not available. If the air conditioning is on and
the outside temperature drops below a
temperature which is too cool for air conditioning
to be effective, the air conditioning light turns
off to let you know the air conditioning mode has
been canceled.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let
hot inside air escape. This helps to reduce the
time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also
helps the system to operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you might notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath the vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
248
Sensors
The interior temperature
sensor, located in the
headliner, measures the
temperature of the air
inside your vehicle.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor
located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the
outside air temperature and helps maintain the
temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the
front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in
the displayed temperature on the rearview mirror.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, in
the middle of the instrument panel, monitors
the solar radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor
or the system will not work properly.
The climate control system uses the information
from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting
by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and
the air delivery mode. The system may also supply
cooler air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun.
The recirculation mode will also be used as needed
to maintain cool outlet temperatures.
249
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of
high humidity (moisture) condensing on the
cool window glass. This can be minimized if the
climate control system is used properly. There
are two modes to clear fog or frost from
the windshield.
Use H and G to select the defog or
defrost modes.
- (Defog): Press this button to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. This mode directs air to the
windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.
When this mode is selected, the system turns
off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is
close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot
be selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
250
0 (Defrost): Press this button to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly. This
mode directs a portion of the air to the windshield
and side window vents and some to the floor
vents. In this mode, the system will automatically
force outside air into your vehicle. The
recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this setting, unless
the outside temperature is close to freezing. Do
not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): If your vehicle
has this feature, press this button to turn the
defogger on or off. It automatically turns off several
minutes after it has been activated. The defogger
can also be turned off by turning the engine
off. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows
are clear.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions may damage
the rear defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
W (Heated Mirrors): If your vehicle has heated
outside rearview mirrors, the mirrors will heat
to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the
mirror when the rear window defog button is
pressed. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 181.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the air outlets located in the center and
on the side of the instrument panel to direct
the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice,
snow, or any other obstruction, such as
leaves. The heater and defroster will work
better, reducing the chance of fogging
the inside of your windows.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, set
the fan speed to maximum airflow for a few
moments before driving. This helps clear
the intake ducts of snow and moisture, and
reduces the chance of fogging the inside
of your windows.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear
of objects. This helps air to circulate
throughout your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of the
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, can
affect the performance of the heating and air
conditioning system. Check with your
dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
251
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to
cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying
attention to the warning lights and gages could also
save you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
the details show on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If
you are familiar with this section, you should
not be alarmed when this happens.
252
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there is a problem with your
vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on as you are driving, or when one of
the gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about it.
Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous. So
please get to know your vehicle’s warning
lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center
(DIC) that works along with warning lights and
gages. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 285 for more information.
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Light Duty Premium version shown. Canada, Uplevel, Base, Heavy Duty Clusters similar.
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will
know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know
to drive safely and economically. If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual for more information.
253
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour
(km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle
has been driven, in either miles (used in the
United States) or kilometers (used in Canada).
The trip odometer can tell you how far your
vehicle has been driven since you last set the trip
odometer to zero.
Engine Hour Meter Display
The Driver Information Center (DIC) can also
display the number of hours the engine has run.
To display the engine hours, turn the ignition
off, press and hold the reset button for at least
four seconds. The hour meter will be displayed for
up to 30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned
on. See DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons) on page 274 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281
for more information.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument
panel cluster next to the voltmeter, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular
odometer. Holding the reset button for
approximately one second while the trip
odometer is displayed will reset it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition
off, press the reset button.
See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 274 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281 for
more information.
Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). See “Grade Braking
(Allison Transmission®)” under Tow/Haul Mode
on page 152 for more information.
254
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a
chime will sound for several seconds to remind
people to buckle their safety belts. The driver
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several
more. You should buckle your seat belt.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled
and the vehicle
is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor
the light will come on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light (1500 Series)
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. The passenger safety belt light will also
come on and stay on for several seconds, then it
will flash for several more.
This chime and light will
be repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 258 for more information.
255
Airbag Readiness Light
Airbag Off Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system check includes the
airbag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module and, if
equipped, the passenger sensing system. For more
information on the airbag system, see Airbag
System on page 89.
If your vehicle has an airbag on-off switch, it also
has a passenger airbag status indicator located
in the overhead console.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
This means the system
is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while you are
driving, the airbag system may not be working
properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.
256
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag
status indicator ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, will light for several seconds as a system
check. Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol,
will light to let you know the status of the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag.
When you manually turn the right front passenger’s
airbag off using the airbag on-off switch in the
glove box, the indicator light OFF or the off symbol
will come on and stay on to remind you that the
airbag has been turned off.
This light will go off when you turn the airbag on.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 100 for more
on this, including important safety information.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s airbag is
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national
government, that person will not have the
extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and
help protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger’s airbag
unless the person sitting there is in a risk
group identified by the national
government. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 100 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light ever comes
on when you have turned off the airbag, it
means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. The right front
passenger’s airbag could inflate even
though the switch is off. If this ever
happens, do not let anyone whom the
national government has identified as a
member of a passenger airbag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See Airbag Off Switch on
page 100 and Airbag Readiness Light on
page 256 for more on this, including
important safety information.
257
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit, it means
that the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
is enabled (may inflate). See Airbag Off Switch on
page 100 for more on this, including important
safety information.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator
lights remain on, or if there are no lights at
all, there may be a problem with the lights or the
airbag on-off switch. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,
your overhead console will have a passenger
airbag status indicator.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a
system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or
either the on or off symbol to let you know the status
of the right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled
(may inflate).
258
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have
a rear-facing child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat, it means that
the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. A
child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag if the
system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off. We
recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
airbag status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 103 for more on
this, including important safety information.
259
If, after several seconds, both status indicator
lights remain on, or if there are no lights at
all, there may be a problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something may
be wrong with the airbag system. If this
ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
may not have the protection of the
airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light on
page 256 for more on this, including
important safety information.
260
Charging System Light
If this light comes on
when the engine is
running, there could be
a problem with the
charging system.
This light will also stay on while the key is in RUN
until the engine is started.
If the light stays on after starting the engine it
could indicate a problem with the generator drive
belt, or some other charging system problem.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this light
is on could drain the battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
on, it helps to turn off all of the electrical
accessories, such as the radio and the blower.
Voltmeter Gage
Your vehicle may have
a voltmeter gage.
Readings outside the normal operating range may
also occur when a large number of electrical
accessories are operating in the vehicle and the
engine is left idling for an extended period.
This condition is normal since the charging system
is not able to provide full power at engine idle.
As engine speeds are increased, this condition
should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow
the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the
readings outside the normal operating range. If
you must drive, turn off all unnecessary
accessories.
When the ignition is in RUN, this gage indicates
the battery voltage.
When the engine is running, this gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage
may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to
higher reading, this is normal. If the vehicle is
operating outside the normal operating range, the
charging system light will come on. See Charging
System Light on page 260 for more information.
The voltmeter gage may also read lower when in
fuel economy mode. This is normal.
Readings outside the normal operating range
indicate a possible problem in the electrical
system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible.
261
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning
light will come on when you set the parking brake.
If you try to drive with the parking brake engaged,
a chime will sound when the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime
sounds there could be a brake problem. Have
your brake system inspected right away.
This light may also come on due to low brake
fluid. See Brakes on page 535 for more
information.
United States
262
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If it does not come
on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn
you if there is a problem.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. You may notice
that the pedal is harder to push or may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the
light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 443.
Antilock Brake System
Warning Light
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light will
come on briefly when
you start the engine.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the
light comes on when you are driving, stop as
soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition
off. Then start the engine again to reset the
system. If the ABS light still stays on, or comes on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is
not on, you still have brakes, but you do not
have antilock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have
antilock brakes and there is a problem with your
regular brakes. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 262
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center
(DIC), see DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 285 for all brake related DIC messages.
263
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
If equipped, this warning
light should come on
briefly when the engine
is started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, there may be a problem with your
StabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may need
service. When this warning light is on, the system
is off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak®
system is active.
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time
when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs
service. See StabiliTrak® System on page 385
for more information.
264
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your
vehicle is working. During a majority of the
operation, the gage will read 210°F (100°C) or
less. If you are pulling a load or going up hills, it is
normal for the temperature to fluctuate and go
over the 235°F (113°C) mark. However, if the gage
reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond
its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 523.
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on
briefly when you turn
the ignition to RUN.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will accompany
the light. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 285 for more information.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Tires on page 558 for more
information.
This light will flash for approximately 60 seconds
and then stay on if a problem is detected with
the Tire Pressure Monitor system.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 569
for more information.
This light will also come on when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
265
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition,
and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to assure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
266
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well, your vehicle’s
fuel economy might not be as good, and the
engine might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that might not be
covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and can cause
this light to come on. Modifications to these
systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 494.
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and may damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may
be required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
your vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps, and see your dealer for service as
soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 500.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the light off.
267
Did you just drive through a deep puddle
of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The
condition will usually be corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 497. Poor fuel
quality will cause your engine not to run as
efficiently as designed. You may notice this as
stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system
and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
268
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or may begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced your battery or if your battery has
run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
A reading outside the normal operating range may
be caused by a dangerously low oil level or
some other problem causing low oil pressure.
Check your oil as soon as possible. See
“OIL PRESSURE LOW” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 285 and Engine Oil (Gasoline
Engine) on page 508.
{CAUTION:
United States
Canada
Your vehicle may have an engine oil pressure
gage. It shows the engine oil pressure in psi
(pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but if readings
are outside the normal operating range, the oil
pressure light will come on. See Oil Pressure Light
on page 270 for more information.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others could
be burned. Check your oil as soon as
possible and have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
269
Oil Pressure Light
This light will come on
briefly when you start
your engine.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
That is a check to be sure the light works. If it
does not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will
be there to warn you if something goes wrong.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
270
When the light comes on and stays on, it means
that oil is not flowing through your engine
properly. You could be low on oil and you might
have some other system problem.
Security Light
This light flashes when
the vehicle security
system is activated.
Fog Lamp Light
Highbeam On Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are
turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 230 for
more information.
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on
page 220 for more information.
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
The light goes out when the cruise control is
turned off. See Cruise Control on page 224 for
more information.
The four-wheel-drive
light comes on when
you shift a manual
transfer case into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages.
Some delay between the shifting and the light
coming on is normal.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 154 for more
information.
271
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light comes on
when the Tow/Haul
mode has been
activated.
For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on
page 152.
Fuel Gage
The gage will first indicate empty before you are
out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as
soon as possible.
When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 285 for more information.
Here are some situations you may experience with
your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the fuel gage indicated. For example, the
gage may have indicated the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or less than
half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
If you have a diesel engine, see “Fuel Gage” in
the Diesel Engine Supplement.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you have left in your tank.
272
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light, under the fuel
gage, will come on
briefly when you
are starting the engine.
This light and a chime will come on when the fuel
tank is low on fuel. There will also be a “FUEL
LEVEL LOW” message on the Driver Information
Center, see DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 285 for more information. When you add fuel
this light and message should go off. If it does
not, have your vehicle serviced.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information
Center (DIC).
The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It
also displays warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
All messages will appear in the DIC display
located below the tachometer in the instrument
panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a
short delay, the DIC will display the information
that was last displayed before the engine was
turned off.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”
later in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons) on page 295 for the displays
available.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons,
see “DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons)” later in this section for the
displays available.
273
DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information
below explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be
accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
The DIC also allows some features to be
customized. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 295 for more information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use
the trip odometer reset stem to view some of
the DIC displays. See “DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)” later in this section.
274
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
information,
customization, and
set/reset buttons. The
button functions
are detailed in the
following pages.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average
economy, fuel used, timer, and transmission
temperature. Some vehicles also display
instantaneous economy and an Active Fuel
Management™ indicator.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to
display the oil life, units, tire pressure readings
for vehicles with a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, trailer brake gain and output information
for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, engine hours, Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming for
vehicles with a TPM system, and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Odometer
U (Customization): Press this button to
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the
vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also display the odometer.
customize the feature settings on your vehicle.
See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons)
on page 295 for more information.
To switch between English and metric
measurements, see “Units” later in this section.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset
certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last
reset for the trip odometer. Pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will also display the trip
odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing
the set/reset button while the trip odometer is
displayed. You can also reset the trip odometer
while it is displayed by pressing and holding
the trip odometer reset stem.
275
The trip odometer has a feature called the
retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip
odometer to the number of miles (kilometers)
driven since the ignition was last turned on. This
can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and
hold the set/reset button for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the number of
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since the
ignition was last turned on and the vehicle
was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, the
trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For
example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km)
before it is started again, and then the retro-active
reset feature is activated, the display will show
5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
276
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This display shows the approximate
number of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km)
the vehicle can be driven without refueling. The
display will show LOW if the fuel level is low.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving
history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. This estimate will change if driving
conditions change. For example, if driving in traffic
and making frequent stops, this display may
read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a
freeway, the number may change even though
the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is
because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city
driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is
calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this menu item was
reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and
hold the set/reset button.
Fuel Used
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED
displays. This display shows the number of
gallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the last
reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the set/reset button
while FUEL USED is displayed.
Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.
This display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the
amount of time that has passed since the
timer was last reset, not including time the ignition
is off. Time will continue to be counted as long
as the ignition is on, even if another display
is being shown on the DIC. The timer will
record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display
will return to zero.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly
while TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the
set/reset button while TIMER is displayed.
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP
displays. This display shows the temperature of
the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
277
Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel
Management™ Indicator
If your vehicle has this display, press the trip/fuel
button until INST ECONOMY V8 MODE
displays. This display shows the current fuel
economy at a particular moment and will change
frequently as driving conditions change. This
display shows the instantaneous fuel economy in
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
economy, this screen cannot be reset.
An Active Fuel Management™ indicator will
display on the right side of the DIC, while
INST ECONOMY displays on the left side. Active
Fuel Management™ allows the engine to
operate on either four or eight cylinders, depending
on your driving demands. When Active Fuel
Management™ is active, V4 MODE will display on
the DIC. When Active Fuel Management™ is
inactive, V8 MODE will display. See Active Fuel
Management™ on page 145 for more information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
278
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to
scroll through the following menu items:
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see
99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that
means 99% of the current oil life remains. The
engine oil life system will alert you to change your
oil on a schedule consistent with your driving
conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285. You
should change your oil as soon as you can. See
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 508. In
addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on
page 633 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset
itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
display accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be
reset accurately until the next oil change. To
reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 511.
Units
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in
this display, press the set/reset button to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of
the vehicle information will then be displayed in
the unit of measurement selected.
Tire Pressure
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, the pressure for each tire can be
viewed in the DIC. The tire pressure will be shown
in either pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa). Press the vehicle information
button until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected
by the system while driving, a message advising
you to check the pressure in a specific tire
will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 567 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 285 for more information.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes
instead of a value, there may be a problem with
your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see
your dealer/retailer for service.
Trailer Gain and Output
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display
appears in the DIC. Press the vehicle information
button until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with
either a trailer connected or disconnected.
To adjust this setting, see “Integrated Trailer
Brake Control System” under Towing a Trailer on
page 449 for more information.
279
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer
anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected.
Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes
may appear in the OUTPUT display. See
“Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 449 for more information.
Engine Hours
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE
HOURS displays. This display shows the total
number of hours the engine has run.
Relearn Tire Positions
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, after rotating the tires or after replacing
a tire or sensor, the system must re-learn the tire
positions. To re-learn the tire positions, see
Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 569. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 574 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 285 for more
information.
Relearn Remote Key
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match
an RKE transmitter to your vehicle, do the following:
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY
displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
on the first transmitter at the same time for
about 15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the
transmitter is matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must
cycle the key to LOCK.
280
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
information below explains the operation of
this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be
accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem
located on the instrument panel cluster. Pressing
the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off,
or acknowledge, DIC messages.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you
can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the
following displays: odometer, engine hours,
trip odometer, transmission temperature, trailer
brake gain and output information for vehicles with
the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC)
system, oil life, Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system programming for vehicles with a TPM
system, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming, and display language.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the
trip odometer reset stem to view the following
displays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer,
and display language.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays. This display shows the
distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Engine Hours
To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition
in LOCK or ACCESSORY, then press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows
the total number of hours the engine has run.
281
Trip Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP
displays. This display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km)
since the last reset for the trip odometer.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing
and holding the trip odometer reset stem while
the trip odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature called the
retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip
odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven
since the ignition was last turned on. This can be
used if the trip odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and
hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least
four seconds. The trip odometer will display the
number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven
since the ignition was last turned on and the
vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins
moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.
282
For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then
the retro-active reset feature is activated, the
display will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle
begins moving, the display will then increase
to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRANS
TEMP displays. This display shows the temperature
of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
Trailer Gain and Output
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display
appears in the DIC. Press the trip odometer reset
stem until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with
either a trailer connected or disconnected.
To adjust this setting, see “Integrated Trailer
Brake Control System” under Towing a Trailer on
page 449 for more information.
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer
anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected.
Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes
may appear in the OUTPUT display. See
“Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 449 for more information.
Oil Life
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem until
OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display
shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful
life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
display, that means 99% of the current oil life
remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to
change your oil on a schedule consistent with
your driving conditions.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285. You
should change your oil as soon as you can.
See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 508. In
addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See
Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on
page 633 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset
itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
display accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be
reset accurately until the next oil change. To
reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
Life System on page 511.
Relearn Tire Positions
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) system, after rotating the tires or
after replacing a tire or sensor, the system
must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tire
positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 569. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 574 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 285 for more information.
283
Relearn Remote Key
Language
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). This display allows you to match
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to your
vehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to your
vehicle, do the following:
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem
for three seconds.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING
ACTIVE will display.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
on the first transmitter at the same time for
about 15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the
transmitter is matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must
cycle the key to LOCK.
This display allows you to select the language in
which the DIC messages will appear. To select
a language, do the following:
284
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays.
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press
and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
three seconds until the currently set language
displays.
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem to scroll through all of the available
languages.
The available languages are ENGLISH
(default), FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL
(Spanish), and NO CHANGE.
4. Once the desired language is displayed,
release the trip odometer reset stem to
set your choice.
DIC Warnings and Messages
The following are the possible messages that can
be displayed and some information about them.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be needed by the driver
to correct the condition. Multiple messages may
appear one after another.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,
see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons
on the instrument panel or the trip odometer
reset stem on the instrument panel cluster
to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
This message displays when the engine oil needs
to be changed. When you change the engine
oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 511 for information on how to reset the
message. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
on page 508 and Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine) on page 633 for more
information.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any messages that
appear on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the messages will only make the
messages disappear, not correct the problem.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
285
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
CHECK TRAILER WIRING
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the vehicle’s tires need
to be checked. This message also displays
LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or
RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to
be checked. You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button or the trip
odometer reset stem. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
See Tires on page 558, Loading Your Vehicle on
page 428, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 567. The DIC display also shows the tire
pressure values for the front and rear tires
by pressing the vehicle information button. See
“DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”
earlier in this section. If the tire pressure is
low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
See Tire Pressure Light on page 265.
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, this message may display
and a chime may sound when one of the
following conditions exists:
• A trailer with electric brakes becomes
disconnected from the vehicle.
− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle
is stopped, this message clears itself
after a short time.
− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle
is moving, this message stays on until
the ignition is turned off.
• There is a short in the wiring to the electric
trailer brakes.
286
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your
vehicle over to the side of the road and turn
the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the
trailer and turn the ignition back on. This
message clears if the trailer is reconnected. This
message also clears if you acknowledge it. If
this message still displays, either your vehicle or
the trailer needs service. See your dealer.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System”
under Towing a Trailer on page 449 for more
information.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle
is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears
on the DIC.
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
TURNED OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature
Gage on page 264. To avoid added strain on a hot
engine, the air conditioning compressor
automatically turns off. When the coolant
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
If this message continues to appear, have the
system repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible to avoid damage to the engine.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
If your vehicle has an oil level sensor, this
message displays if the oil level in the vehicle is
low. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool
or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure
this message clears. See Engine Oil (Gasoline
Engine) on page 508 for additional information.
287
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop
the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine
Overheating on page 523 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 264.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode (V8 Engines Only) on page 526 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. See
Engine Overheating on page 523 for more
information.
288
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message clears when the
engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the cooling system temperature gets too hot
and the engine further enters the engine coolant
protection mode. See Engine Overheating on
page 523 for further information.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s
engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power
can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this
message is on, but there is no reduction in
performance, proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer for service as soon as possible.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible.
See Fuel Gage on page 272 and Fuel on page 496
for more information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while
the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine
damage may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 508
for more information.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close
the hood again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab)
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and
the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and
close the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause of the low
oil pressure has been corrected. Check the oil as
soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
on page 508.
289
PARK ASSIST OFF
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has been
started, this message displays to remind the
driver that the URPA system has been turned off.
Press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
reset stem to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display. To turn the URPA
system back on, see Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) on page 234.
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
your vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 119 and DIC Operation
and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 274 or
DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)
on page 281 for more information.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger’s door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery
needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See
“Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 119.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab)
This message displays and a chime sounds if
the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed
and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and
turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
290
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
This message displays if a problem occurs with
the four-wheel-drive system. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin
driving, the four-wheel-drive system needs service.
See your dealer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your dealer inspect
the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 256 and Airbag System on page 89
for more information.
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
On some vehicles, this message displays if there
is a problem with the battery charging system.
Under certain conditions, the charging system light
may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster.
See Charging System Light on page 260.
Driving with this problem could drain the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Have the
electrical system checked as soon as possible.
See your dealer.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake
system warning light if there is a problem with the
brake system. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 262. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on
the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the
brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer.
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
This message displays if there is a problem with
the brake system. If this message appears, stop as
soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart
the vehicle and check for the message on the
DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the
brake system needs service. See your dealer.
291
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, this message displays
if there is a problem with the URPA system. Do
not use this system to help you park. See
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on
page 234 for more information. See your dealer
for service.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak® system. If you see this message, try to
reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at
least 15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this
message still comes on, it means there is a
problem. You should see your dealer for service.
The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you do not
have the benefit of StabiliTrak®, so reduce your
speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or
may not restart so you may want to take the
292
vehicle to your dealer before turning off the
engine. See PASS-Key® III+ Operation on
page 137 for more information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message displays if a part on the
system is not working properly. If you drive your
vehicle while any of the four sensors are missing or
inoperable, the warning comes on in about
20 minutes. A sensor would be missing, for
example, if you put different wheels on your vehicle
without transferring the sensors. If the warning
comes on and stays on, there may be a problem
with the TPM. See your dealer.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message
displays when there is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). When this message
displays, the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See your dealer
for service. See StabiliTrak® System on page 385
for more information.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, this message displays and
a chime sounds when there is a problem with
the ITBC system.
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your
vehicle over to the side of the road and turn
the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the
trailer and turn the ignition back on. If this
message still displays, either your vehicle or the
trailer needs service. See your dealer.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System”
under Towing a Trailer on page 449 for more
information.
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message
displays when you turn off StabiliTrak®, or when
the stability control has been automatically
disabled. To limit wheel spin and realize the full
benefits of the stability enhancement system, you
should normally leave StabiliTrak® on. However,
you should turn StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and you want
to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if you
are driving in extreme off-road conditions and
require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 426. To
turn the StabiliTrak® system on or off, see
StabiliTrak® System on page 385.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
• One condition is overheating, which could
occur if StabiliTrak® activates continuously
for an extended period of time.
• The message also displays if the brake
system warning light is on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 262.
• The message could display if the stability
system takes longer than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the
vehicle needs service. See your dealer.
• The message also displays if the vehicle is
shifted into 4LO.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions
that caused the message to be displayed are
no longer present.
293
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message may display along with the check
engine light on the instrument panel cluster if
the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 266.
Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank on
page 500. The diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving
trips with the cap properly installed should turn this
light and message off.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message
displays when the Traction Control System (TCS)
is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 385 for more
information.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
This message clears itself after several seconds.
This message also clears if you acknowledge
it. After this message clears, the TRAILER
GAIN/OUTPUT display appears in the DIC.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
system, this message displays when the system
is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle.
See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 274 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281 for
more information. The tire positions must be
re-learned after rotating the tires or after replacing
a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 574, Tire Pressure Monitor
System on page 569, and Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 567 for more information.
294
TRAILER CONNECTED
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, this message displays
briefly when a trailer with electric brakes is
first connected to the vehicle.
See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT” under DIC
Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on
page 274 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without
DIC Buttons) on page 281 and “Integrated
Trailer Brake Control System” under Towing a
Trailer on page 449 for more information.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while
the transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC,
you can damage the transmission. This could
lead to costly repairs that would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
vehicle with overheated transmission fluid
or while the transmission temperature warning
is displayed.
This message displays when the windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir as soon as possible. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 506 for the
location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 533
for more information.
This message displays along with a continuous
chime if the transmission fluid in the vehicle
gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid
temperature high can cause damage to the
vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the
transmission to cool. This message clears and
the chime stops when the fluid temperature
reaches a safe level.
TURN SIGNAL ON
DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons)
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to
one preferred setting. Customization features can
only be programmed to one setting on the
vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred
setting for two different drivers.
All of the customization options may not be
available on your vehicle. Only the options
available will be displayed on your DIC.
This message displays and a chime sounds if a
turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km).
Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the
off position.
295
The default settings for the customization features
were set when your vehicle left the factory, but
may have been changed from their default
state since then.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
2. Press the customization button to scroll
through the available customizable options.
296
The following are customization features that allow
you to program settings to the vehicle:
This feature will only display if a language other
than English has been set. This feature allows you
to change the language in which the DIC
messages appear to English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V
TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on
the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to
display all DIC messages in English.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
This feature allows you to select the language in
which the DIC messages will appear.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to access the
settings for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear
in English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select when the
vehicle’s doors will automatically lock. See
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 126
for more information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
PARK (P).
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle speed is
above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.
You can also change the language by pressing
the trip odometer reset stem. See “Language”
under DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons) earlier in this section for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
297
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It
also allows you to select which doors and
when the doors will automatically unlock. See
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 126
for more information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door
will unlock when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of
feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
You will not receive feedback when locking
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors
are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 119 for more
information.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Press the customization button until REMOTE
DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock
when the key is taken out of the ignition.
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press
the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when
you press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
298
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second
press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior
lamps will flash when you press the lock button on
the RKE transmitter, and the horn will sound
when the lock button is pressed again within
five seconds of the previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Press the customization button until REMOTE
DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to access
the settings for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash
when you press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select the type of
feedback you will receive when unlocking the
vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive feedback when
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the
doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 119 for more
information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
299
DELAY DOOR LOCK
On vehicles with a crew cab, this feature allows you
to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle’s
doors will be delayed. When locking the doors with
the power door lock switch and a door is open,
this feature will delay locking the doors until
five seconds after the last door is closed. You will
hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use. The key must be out of the ignition
for this feature to work. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power
door lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter twice. See Delayed Locking on
page 126 for more information.
Press the customization button until DELAY
DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of
the vehicle’s doors.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door is closed.
300
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
EXIT LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of
time you want the exterior lamps to remain
on when it is dark enough outside. This happens
after the key is turned from RUN to LOCK.
Press the customization button until EXIT
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will
stay on for 30 seconds.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during
low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the
exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until
the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on
page 119 for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level
of the chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME
VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be set
to a normal level.
301
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a
loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
select whether or not the outside mirror(s)
will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside Power
Foldaway Mirrors on page 182 for more
information.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted
down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
302
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle
is shifted into REVERSE (R).
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
EASY EXIT SEAT
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
select your preference for the automatic easy exit
seat feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals on page 13 for more information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the
DIC to select it.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
SEAT appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall
will occur.
Press the customization button until MEMORY
SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the
key is removed from the ignition.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only
occur one time after the key is removed from
the ignition. If the automatic movement has already
occurred, and you put the key back in the
ignition and remove it again, the seat will stay in
the original exit position, unless a memory
recall took place prior to removing the key again.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
select your preference for the remote memory seat
recall feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals on page 13 for more information.
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall
will occur.
303
ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the
stored driving position when the unlock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
pressed. On some vehicles with the adjustable
throttle and brake pedal feature, the pedals
will also automatically move. See “Relearn Remote
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons) on page 274 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281
for more information on matching transmitters to
driver ID numbers.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
turn the remote start off or on. The remote
start feature allows you to start the engine from
outside of the vehicle using your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See ″Remote Vehicle
Start″ under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 119 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE
START appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will
be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
304
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the
customization features back to their factory
default settings.
This feature allows you to exit the feature
settings menu.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization
features will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features
will not be set to their factory default settings.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to exit
the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization
button again will return you to the beginning of the
feature settings menu.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any
of the following occurs:
• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons
are pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is
reached and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
305
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
safer driving experience. See Defensive Driving on
page 378. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
306
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
safe driving. Here are some ways in which you can
help avoid distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment
to your vehicle, such as an audio system,
CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,
or two-way radio, make sure that it can be
added by checking with your dealer/retailer.
Also, check federal rules covering mobile radio
and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment can interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,
or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems can interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has
been added.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition is
turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 141 for more information.
Setting the Time
AM-FM Radio with Optional CD Player
If your vehicle has an AM/FM radio with an
optional CD player, it has a clock button for setting
the time. With these types of radios, the clock
can be set with either the radio turned on or off.
Set the time by following these steps:
1. Press the clock button until the hour numbers
begin flashing on the display. Press the clock
button a second time and the minute
numbers begin flashing on the display. Press
the clock button a third time and the 12HR
or 24HR time format begins flashing.
2. While either the hour or the minute numbers
are flashing, turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio faceplate,
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the time. While the 12HR or
24HR time format is flashing, turn the tune
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to select
the default time settings.
3. Press the clock button again until the clock
display stops flashing to set the currently
displayed time; otherwise, the flashing stops
after five seconds and the current time
displayed will be automatically set.
307
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a
Single CD and DVD Player
Changing the Time and Date
Default Settings
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a
CD and DVD player, it has a clock button for
setting the time and date.
You can change the time default setting from
12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default
setting from month/day/year to day/month/year.
To set the time and date, follow the instructions:
To change the time or date default settings, follow
these instructions:
1. Press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow
that is currently displayed on the radio screen
until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
and the date MM/DD (month and day)
and DD/MM (day and month) displays.
1. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and
year) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any
one of the labels that you want to change.
Every time the pushbutton is pressed again,
the time or the date if selected, increases
by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD
(forward) button.
3. To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.
You can also turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, to adjust
the selected setting.
308
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option.
3. Press the clock button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD
player, the radio has a MENU button instead of
the clock button to set the time and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the clock
option displays, press the pushbutton
located under that label. The HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,
and year) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any
one of the time or date setting labels that
you want to change. Every time the
pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the
date if selected, increases by one.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is
to press the right SEEK arrow or the FWD
(forward) button.
3. To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.
You can also turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, to adjust
the selected setting.
Changing the Time and Date
Default Settings
You can change the time default setting from
12 hours to 24 hours or change the date default
setting from month/day/year to day/month/year.
To change the time or date default settings, follow
these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the clock
option displays, press the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is
currently displayed on the radio screen until
the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the
date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option.
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
309
AM-FM Radio
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is off, press this
button to display the time.
H (Clock): Your vehicle has a clock button for
setting the time. With this type of radio, the clock
can be set with either the radio turned on or off. See
Setting the Time on page 307 for more information.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display shows the selection.
f (Tune): Turn this knob clockwise or
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
When the radio is turned on, it plays at the volume
level that was last set. The volume can be
adjusted using the volume knob.
310
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
station frequency.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK arrow
to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow
for two seconds until a beep sounds. The radio
goes to a station, plays for a few seconds, then
goes to the next station. The station frequency
flashes while the radio is in the scan mode. Press
either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
To scan presets within the current selected band,
press and hold either seek arrow for four seconds
until a double beep sounds. The radio goes to a
stored preset, plays for a few seconds if a strong
signal is present, then goes to the next stored
preset. The station frequency flashes while the
radio is in the scan mode.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep
sounds. Whenever that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 2-4 for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Bass/Treble: To adjust the bass or treble, press
the tune knob or the EQ button until the desired
tone control label displays. Turn the tune
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the setting. The display shows the
current bass or treble level. If a station’s frequency
is weak, or if there is static, decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
` (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance or
fade, press this button or the tune knob until the
desired speaker control label displays. Turn
the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
adjust the setting.
The setting can also be adjusted by pressing the
seek arrows.
Radio Messages
Loc (Locked): This message displays while the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
311
Radio with CD (Base)
H (Clock): Your vehicle has a clock button for
setting the time. With this type of radio, the clock
can be set with either the radio turned on or
off. See Setting the Time on page 307 for more
information.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,
FM2, or AM. The display shows the selection.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
When the radio is turned on, it plays at the volume
level that was last set. The volume can be
adjusted by using the volume knob.
312
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for two seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. The station
frequency flashes while the radio is in the scan
mode. Press either SEEK arrow again to stop
scanning.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
To scan presets within the current selected band,
press and hold either seek arrow for four seconds
until a double beep sounds. The radio goes to
a stored preset, plays for a few seconds if a strong
signal is present, then goes to the next stored
preset. The station frequency flashes while
the radio is in the scan mode.
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the radio station frequency
and the time. While the ignition is off, press this
button to display the time.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),
can be programmed on the six numbered
pushbuttons, by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep
sounds. Whenever that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each
pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/TREB (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bass
or treble, press the tune knob button or the
EQ pushbutton until the desired tone control label
displays. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
setting. The display shows the current bass
or treble level. If a station’s frequency is weak, or
if there is static, decrease the treble.
Unique BASS/TREB settings can be saved for
each source.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
` BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust the
balance or fade, press this button or the tune knob
until the desired speaker control label displays.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the setting. The setting can also be
adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD
(forward), or REV (reverse) buttons.
313
Radio Messages
Loc (Locked): This message displays while the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears on
the radio display. As each new track starts to
play, the track number displays.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
314
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 374 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
the CD. If the CD is not removed, after several
seconds, the CD automatically pulls back into
the player.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds have played. Press the right SEEK
arrow to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is
held or pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
pushbutton to advance playback quickly within a
track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release this pushbutton to resume playing the
track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the CD
tracks can be listened to in random, rather than
sequential order. To use random, do the following:
1. Press this button to play tracks from the
CD you are listening to in random order.
The random icon displays.
2. Press this button again to turn off random
play. The random icon disappears from
the display.
RPT (Repeat): Press and release the RPT button
to repeat the track you are listening to. An
arrow symbol displays. Press RPT again to turn
off repeat play.
4 (Information): Press this button to switch the
display between the track number, elapsed time of
the track, and the time. When the ignition is off,
press this button to display the time.
315
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon
and track number displays while a CD is in
the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device such as a portable audio player.
CD Messages
ERR (Error): If this message displays and/or the
CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
316
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD-R.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
NO: This message displays if the EJECT or
CD/AUX buttons are pressed and a CD has not
been inserted into the player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer while reporting
the problem.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 378 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack. When a device is connected, press the
radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio
from the device over the car speakers.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to
do additional volume adjustments from the
portable device if the volume is not loud or
soft enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
while a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or turn it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD while a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, the message NO displays.
317
Radio with CD (MP3)
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. While the radio is
tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or
call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station
could broadcast incorrect information that causes
the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio with CD shown, Radio with
Six-Disc CD similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information.
318
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection
displays.
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). While
SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
to compensate for road and wind noise as
driving speed changes. That way, the volume level
should sound about the same as you drive.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO
VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med
(medium), or High) to select the level of radio
volume compensation. The display times out
after approximately 10 seconds. Each higher
setting allows for more radio volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
319
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or
MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) might appear. Continue pressing the
information button to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under any
one of the labels and the information about that
label displays.
When information is not available, No
Info displays.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to
your favorite stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls, if the
vehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving on
page 378.
320
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations
can be programmed as favorites using the
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. Whenever that
pushbutton is pressed and released, the
station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or
Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,
press the tune knob until the tone control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. The highlighted setting can also be
adjusted by pressing either the SEEK, FWD
(forward), or REV (reverse) button until the desired
levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is
weak or if there is static, decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
different types of music. The choices are pop,
rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns
the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ
settings are either MANUAL or TALK.
321
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker
control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the
tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting
can also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK,
FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button until
the desired levels are obtained.
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
322
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency is displayed. Press the CAT button
to display the category labels on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the
desired category label to immediately tune
to the first XM™ station associated with that
category.
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous XM™ station within the selected
category.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM
CAT label.
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category
you want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
along with the word Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly and your
vehicle must be returned to your dealer for service.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category displays or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
See XM Radio Messages on page 357 later in this
section for further detail.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
323
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the load button for
two seconds. A beep sounds and Load All
Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to
insert the discs. The CD player takes up to
six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. While the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
324
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears
on the CD. As each new track starts to play,
the track number displays. When more than
one CD is in the radio, the desired CD to be played
can be changed by pressing the pushbuttons
located under the displayed Disc label.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs
and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same
manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
scratched, the CD will not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
and DVDs on page 374 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed.
If the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD automatically pulls back into the player and
begins playing.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the
eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD that is currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds on the CD have played. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If either
SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within a track.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
325
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the
tracks can be listened to in random, rather
than sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a
six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of
the CD player. A RDM label displays.
To play the tracks from the single CD in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the LOAD button. A
beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
Insert one or more discs partway into the
slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a
six-disc CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM
label until Randomize All Discs displays. Press
the same pushbutton again to turn off
random play.
326
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing the disc and/or track
number displays when a CD is in the player. Press
this button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player
is not connected, No Input Device Found displays.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
If you have a radio with a single CD (MP3)
or a six-disc CD (MP3) player, it is capable of
playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
CD Messages
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
However, an external audio device such as
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 378 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack. When a device is connected, press the
radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio
from the device over the vehicle speakers.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting
the problem.
327
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise
Radio with CD and DVD (MP3)
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume of the portable player. Additional
volume adjustments might be needed from the
portable device if the volume does not go loud or
soft enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or turn it off.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, No Input Device Found displays.
328
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear
Seat Entertainment System on page 359 for
more information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio
faceplate. The player is capable of reading the
DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video
media, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).
Dolby® is manufactured under license from
Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Playing the Radio
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM
stations that broadcast RDS information. This
system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and only works when the
information is available. While the radio is tuned to
an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters
display. In rare cases, a radio station could
broadcast incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). While
SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
to compensate for road and wind noise as
driving speed changes. That way, the volume level
should sound about the same as you drive. To
activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO
VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCV
setting (OFF, Low, Med (medium), or High) to
select the level of radio volume compensation.
The display times out after approximately
10 seconds. Each higher setting allows
for more radio volume compensation at faster
vehicle speeds.
329
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display shows
the selection.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left or right SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio seeks and scans stations only with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
330
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information related
to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or MP3
song. A choice of additional information such as:
Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT (category) could
appear. Continue pressing the information button to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under any one of the labels and the
information about that label is displayed.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,
and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has them.
See Defensive Driving on page 378.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations
can be programmed as favorites using the
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. Whenever that
pushbutton is pressed and released, the
station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
331
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the tune
knob until the tone control labels display. Continue
pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the
pushbutton positioned under the desired label.
Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the highlighted setting. If a station’s
frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease
the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts
to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for more
than two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
different types of music. The choices are pop,
rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns
the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
332
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ
settings are either MANUAL or TALK.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker
control labels display. Press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the tune
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting can
also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK,
FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button until the
desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. A
beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to the
middle position at one time, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio
disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency displays. Press the CAT button to
display the category labels on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name is displayed.
Another way to navigate the category list
is to press the REV button or the FWD button.
2. Press either of the two buttons below
the desired category label to immediately tune
to the first XM™ station associated with
that category.
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous XM™ station within the selected
category.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM
CAT label.
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category
you want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
along with the word Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category displays or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
333
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle
and it must be returned to your dealer for service.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
See XM Radio Messages on page 357 later in this
section for further detail.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing (loading a disc into the system, depending
on media type and format ranges from
5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds
for a DVD to begin playing).
334
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source. The CD is controlled by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. The DVD/CD decks, (upper
slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the
CD deck) of the radio are compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD
symbol appears on the left side of the radio
display. As each new track starts to play, the track
number appears on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD.
If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not play
properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see
Care of Your CDs and DVDs on page 374 for
more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD eject
button to eject the CD that is currently playing
in the bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting
Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the
CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD eject
button for more than five seconds to force the disc
to eject.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVD
eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing
in the top slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD
is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD eject
button for more than five seconds to force the disc
to eject.
335
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD that is currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current track, if more than
five seconds on the CD have played. If less than
five seconds on the CD have played, the
previous track plays. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is
held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within a track.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
336
RDM (Random): With random, tracks can be
listened to in random, rather than sequential order.
To play the tracks from the CD, press the
DVD/CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD,
or insert a disc partway into the slot. A RDM
label displays. Press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or
DVD remains inside the radio for future listening
or for viewing entertainment.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a
message showing the track or chapter number
displays when a disc is in either slot. Press
this button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player
is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 359 for
more information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen
and use the remote control to navigate the CD
(tracks only) through the remote control.
Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time. An audio source is
defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM,
Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM,
FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the
DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD
slot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s
front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack,
the front seat passengers are able to listen to
playback from this source through the vehicle
speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment System on
page 359 for more information.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
A radio with CD and DVD has the capability of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For
more information on how to play an MP3/WMA
CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in
the index.
Press the power button to turn the radio on. The
radio can be heard through all of the vehicle
speakers.
337
CD Messages
If these messages displays and/or the CD comes
out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
Optical Error: The disc was inserted
upside down.
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an
invalid or unknown format.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc
EJECT problems.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
338
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down
and provide it to your dealer when reporting
the problem.
Using the DVD Player
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on
the remote control or by the buttons on the radio
faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under Rear
Seat Entertainment System on page 359 for more
information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of
the appropriate region code that is printed on
the jacket of most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along
with MP3 and WMA formats.
If an error message appears on the video screen
or the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages”
under, Rear Seat Entertainment System on
page 359 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this
section for more information.
Playing a DVD
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a
message showing track or chapter number
displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 359 for
more information.
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio on or
off. Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume. Press and hold
the knob for more than two seconds to turn off the
entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and to start the parental control feature.
Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant
from operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system
or remote control.
A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until this
button is pressed and held for more than
two seconds again, or until the driver turns the
ignition off and exits the vehicle.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on a
CD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or to
change clock or date settings, while in the clock
or date setting mode. See the information
given earlier in this section specific to the radio,
CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Time” in
the index, for setting the clock and date.
339
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or
button to return to the start of the current track
or chapter. Press this button again to go to
the previous track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
DVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed,
the player automatically pulls it back in after
15 seconds.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press this
button to go to the next track or chapter. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
s REV (Reverse): Press this button to quickly
reverse the CD or DVD at five times the normal
speed. The radio displays the elapsed time while in
fast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press this
button again. This button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button to
fast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays the
elapsed time and fast forwards five times the
normal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
340
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, because of an unknown format, etc.,
and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the
CD eject button for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing.
Press the pushbuttons located under any desired
tag option during DVD playback. See the tag
options listed below for more information.
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat
Entertainment System on page 359 for more
information. The Video Screen automatically turns
on when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or
pause icon displays on the radio system, to toggle
between pausing or restarting playback of a
DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on display,
the system is in pause mode. If the pause
icon is showing on display, the system is in
playback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press the
play button to turn the screen on.
y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the pushbuttons located under the
navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the
enter button. This button only operates when
using a DVD.
Nav (Navigate): Press this button to
display directional arrows for navigating
through the menus.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there might be a delay of up
to 30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing
the movie automatically, press the pushbutton
located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed
on the radio. If the DVD still does not play, refer
to the on-screen instructions, if available.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button operates only when a DVD is playing
and a menu is active.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press
the pushbuttons located under any desired tag
option during DVD playback. See the tag options
listed below for more information.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
choices that are highlighted in any menu.
341
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A
menus and controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat
Entertainment System on page 359 for more
information. The Video Screen does not
automatically power on when the DVD-A is
inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually
turned on by the rear seat occupant through
the remote control power button.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or
pause icon displays on the radio system, to toggle
between pausing or restarting playback of a
DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on display,
the system is in pause mode. If the pause
icon is showing on display, the system is in
playback mode.
q Group r: Press this button to cycle through
musical groupings on the DVD-A disc.
Nav (Navigate): Press this button to
display directional arrows for navigating
through the menus.
342
e (Audio Stream): Press this button to cycle
through audio stream formats located on the
DVD-A disc. There is not any type of notification
for the customer to see through the radio
display, but VSM has a text field that shows
audio stream changing.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player
might not accept some paper labeled media. The
player starts loading the disc into the system
and show “Loading Disc” on the radio display. At
the same time, the radio displays a softkey
menu of option(s). Some discs automatically play
the movie while others default to the softkey
menu display, which requires the Play, Enter, or
Navigation softkeys to be pressed; either by
softkey or by the rear seat passenger using the
remote control.
Loading a disc into the system, depending on
media type and format, ranges from
5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds
for a DVD.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the
system, press the stop button on the remote
control, or press the pushbutton located under the
stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed
on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to
something other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CD
AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
The radio does not resume play of the disc
automatically. If the RSA system is sourced to the
DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVD
player begins to play again. In case loading and
reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed
(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold the DVD Eject button more
than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause
button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol
tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume
play from where it last stopped if the disc has not
been ejected and the stop button has not been
pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has
been ejected or the stop button has been pressed
twice on the remote control, the disc resumes
playing at the beginning of the disc.
DVD Radio Error Messages
Ejecting a Disc
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no
disc is present when the EJECT or DVD/CD AUX
button is pressed on the radio.
Press the eject button on the radio to eject the
disc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, but
not removed, the radio reloads the disc after a
short period of time. The disc is stored in the radio.
Player Error: This message displays when there
are disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the
disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side
up, or if the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the
disc is not from a correct region.
343
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
However, an external audio device such as
an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
Defensive Driving on page 378 for more
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 1/8 inch
(3.5 mm) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack. While a device is connected, the radio
automatically begins playing audio from the
device over the vehicle speakers.
To listen to a device through the rear auxiliary input
over the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Aux button
on the radio faceplate until “Rear Aux Input”
displays on the radio. The RSA or DVD Screen
must be on in order for the radio to source to rear
auxiliary.
344
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. Additional volume
adjustments might be needed from the portable
device if the volume is not loud or soft enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or power it off.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button
to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when
listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and
a message showing track or chapter number
displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”.
If a front auxiliary device is connected, the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available
options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front
Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available). See
“Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in
this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 359
for more information.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
MP3/WMA files. By default the radio shows the
MP3 label on the left side of the screen but plays
both file formats in the order in which they
were recorded to the disc.
MP3/WMA Format
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable
bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a
personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA
files on one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and
a combined total of 512 folders and files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy
to find songs while driving. Organize songs
by albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
345
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension (other file extensions might
not work).
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and
folders, or playlists can cause the player to be
unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish
to play a large number of files, folders, playlists
or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist name. Long names also take
up more space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
Trying to add music to an existing disc might
cause the disc not to function in the player.
346
Playlists can be changed by using the previous
and next folder buttons, the tuner knob, or
the seek buttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW
that was recorded can also be played using no
file folders. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains
more than the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists,
and a combined total of 512 folders and files,
the player lets you access and navigate up to the
maximum, but all items over the maximum are
not accessible.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is
treated as a folder. If the root directory has
compressed audio files, the directory is displayed
as the CD label. All files contained directly
under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)
are always accessed before root folders or files.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD
audio (.CDA) and MP3/WMA files, a folder under
the root directory called CD accesses all of
the CD audio tracks on the disc.
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only
folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are
played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.
No Folder
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only
compressed files, the files are located under the
root folder. The next and previous folder function
does not display on a CD-R or CD-RW that
was recorded without folders or playlists.
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists
and compressed audio files, but no folders, all
files are located under the root folder. The folder
down and the folder up buttons search playlists
(Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default
display. The new track name displays.
347
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
the file name without the extension (such
as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
does not display.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot
(Single CD Player), or press the load button and
wait for the message to insert disc (Six-Disc
CD Player), label side up. The player pulls it in,
and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
348
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.
When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R
or CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound quality
can be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality,
the method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There can be
an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding
tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If
these problems occur, check the bottom surface of
the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD
does not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on
page 374 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or
CD-RW that is currently playing, press and release
this button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc
displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If
the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically
pulls back into the player and begins playing. For
the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving backward
or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA
file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file displays.
349
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an
MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release this button to resume playing the
file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting,
MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be
listened to in random, rather than sequential order,
on one CD-R or CD-RW, or all discs in a six-disc
CD player. To use random, do one of the following:
• To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or
CD-RW in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Random
Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
• To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
350
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or
CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press
the pushbutton located below the music navigator
label. The player scans the disc to sort the files
by artist and album ID3 tag information. It
might take several minutes to scan the disc
depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can
begin playing while it is scanning the disc in
the background. When the scan is finished, the
CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The
current artist playing is shown on the second line
of the display between the arrows. Once all
songs by that artist are played, the player moves
to the next artist in alphabetical order on the
CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA
files by that artist. To listen to MP3/WMA files
by another artist, press the pushbutton located
below either arrow button. The CD goes to
the next or previous artist in alphabetical order.
Continue pressing either button until the desired
artist is displayed.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push one of the
buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. Now the album name
displays on the second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album begins to play. Once
all songs from that album are played, the player
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA
files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable
bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album display
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
MP3/WMA files depending on which slot the disc
is loaded into. By default the radio reads only
the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignores the
MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CD
deck, pressing the CAT button toggles between
compressed and uncompressed audio format, the
default being the uncompressed format (.CDA).
351
MP3/WMA Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
If an MP3/WMA disc is burned on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA
files on one disc.
• Make sure the CD player (lower slot) is able
to read and play a maximum combination of
512 files and folders. The DVD player
(upper slot) is able to read 255 folders,
15 playlists and 40 sessions.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to
find songs while driving. Organize songs by
albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl
or .pls extension as other file extensions
may not work.
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and
folders, or playlists can cause the player to be
unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish
to play a large number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist name. Long names also take
up more space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying
to add music to an existing disc can cause the
disc not to function in the player.
352
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is
treated as a folder. If the root directory has
compressed audio files, the directory is displayed
as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are
always accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
Order of Play
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only
folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are
played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. After the last track of
the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. After the last track of
the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.
No Folder
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only
compressed files, the files are located under the
root folder. The next and previous folder function
does not function on a CD-R or CD-RW that
was recorded without folders or playlists. When
displaying the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists
and compressed audio files, but no folders, all
files are located under the root folder. The folder
down and the folder up buttons search playlists
(Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode was chosen as the default
display. The new track name displays.
353
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
the file name without the extension (such
as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or
four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the
filename displays.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top
or bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in,
and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey
menu appears and allows navigation of the disc.
The menu reads left to right as RDM (Randomize
song play order), a Folder icon with left and right
arrows (to move up or down through available
folders), a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available,
and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag is
shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey
only or the menu as previously described.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.
When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R
or CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
354
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to
eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing in the bottom slot. A sound is heard and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can be removed.
If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for
more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this
button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is
currently playing in the top slot. A sound is heard
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is
ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW
is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or
CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for
more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more
than five seconds have played. If less than
five seconds have played, the previous MP3/WMA
file plays. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow
is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
MP3/WMA files on the CD.
Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
cT (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA
file. A sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file displays.
355
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an
MP3/WMA file. A sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release this button to resume playing the
file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting,
MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be
listened to in random, rather than sequential order.
To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW
you are listening to in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or
CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press
the pushbutton located below the music navigator
label. The player scans the disc to sort the files
by artist and album ID3 tag information. It
might take several minutes to scan the disc
depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
To cancel music navigator while the player is
scanning, press the pushbutton located below the
music navigator label or eject the disc.
356
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the
disc in the background. When the scan is finished,
the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player
defaults to playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist.
The current artist playing is shown on the second
line of the display between the arrows. If you want
to listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press
the pushbutton located below either arrow button.
The disc goes to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist is displayed.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push one of the
buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. Now the album name
is displayed on the second line between the arrows
and songs from the current album begin to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing
MP3/WMA files from that album.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD
remains inside the radio for future listening or
viewing entertainment.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux
Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD
slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and not indicate “No Aux
Input Device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through
all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear
Seat Entertainment System on page 359 for more
information.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen and use
the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These
channels, or any others, can be blocked
at a customer’s request, by calling
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the
receiver is being updated, and no action is
required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning
correctly, but the vehicle is in a location that is
blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is
needed. This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently
in service. Tune to another channel.
357
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned
channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another
station. If this station was one of the presets,
choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No Title Info: No song title information is
available at this time on this channel. The system
is working properly.
No CAT Info: No category information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM TheftLocked: The XM™ receiver in the
vehicle could have previously been in another
vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message appears after having your vehicle
serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio eight digit radio
ID label. This label is needed to activate the
service.
Unknown: If this message is received when
tuned to channel 0, there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational
messages are available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not
clear within a short period of time, the receiver
could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available
for the selected category. The system is working
properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could
have a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
358
Navigation/Radio System
Before You Drive
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers
only. The driver cannot safely view the video
screen while driving and should not try to do so.
The navigation system has built-in features
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology
alone, no matter how advanced, can never
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system
works with the vehicle’s audio system. The
DVD player is part of the front radio. The RSE
system includes a radio with a DVD player, a video
display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless
headphones, and a remote control. See Radio with
CD and DVD (MP3) on page 328 for more
information on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the
RSE system might not work until the temperature
is within the operating range. The operating
range for the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C)
or below 140°F (60°C). If the temperature of
your vehicle is outside of this range, heat or cool
the vehicle until the temperature is within the
operating range of the RSE system.
Parental Control
The RSE system could have a Parental Control
feature, depending on the radio. The Parental
Control feature turns off the video screen and Rear
Seat Audio (RSA). This feature also disables all
button operations from the remote control and
all audio button operations from the RSA.
This feature can be used to gain the attention of
the rear passengers that are using headphones.
359
To enable Parental Control, press and hold the
radio power button for more than two seconds. If
on, the radio, video screen, and RSA turns
off. If a DVD and/or CD is playing, it stops. While
Parental Control is on, either a padlock icon or
a text message comes on, depending on the radio.
When the radio is turned back on, the RSE
system remains in Parental Control.
Headphones
To turn off Parental Control, press and hold the
radio power button for more than two seconds. The
video screen and RSA returns to the state they
were in before Parental Control was turned on and
if the padlock icon is on the display, it disappears.
Parental Control is also turned off by inserting
or ejecting a disc, by pressing the play icon on the
radio DVD display menu, or when the ignition is
turned off.
360
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless
headphones that are dedicated to this system.
These headphones are used to listen to media such
as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, any auxiliary
source connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input
jack, if your vehicle has this feature. The wireless
headphones have an On/Off button, channel
1/2 switch, and a volume control.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones
comes on. If the light does not come on,
the batteries might need to be replaced. See
“Battery Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Switch the headphones to Off when
not in use. Channel 1 is dedicated to the video
screen, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA
selections.
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut
off automatically to save the battery power if the
RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the
headphones are out of range of the transmitters
for more than three minutes. While wearing
the headphones, if you move too far forward or
step out of the vehicle, they can lose the
audio signal.
The headphones automatically turn off after
four hours of continuous use.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones
must be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left)
appears on the upper left side, above the ear pad
and should be positioned on the left ear. The
symbol R (Right) appears on the upper right side,
above the ear pad and should be positioned on
the right ear.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be
replaced separately from the headphone set. Refer
to your dealer/retailer for more information.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
361
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do
the following:
1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver to
loosen the battery door located on the left
side of the headphones. Slide the battery
door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the
door screw.
362
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor
console, allow audio or video signals to be
connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE
system. Adapter connectors or cables could be
required to connect the auxiliary device to the A/V
jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions
for proper usage.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical
home entertainment system equipment. The yellow
jack (A) is for the video input. The white jack (B)
is for the left audio input. The red jack (C) is for the
right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,
connect an external auxiliary device to the
color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary
device and the video screen power on. If the
video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing
the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control
switches the video screen from the DVD
player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary
device by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CD
and DVD (MP3) on page 328 for more information.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language
can be changed from the on screen setup menu.
To change any feature, do the following:
1. Press the display menu button on the
remote control.
2. Use the remote control menu navigation
arrows and the enter button to use the
setup menu.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can
be heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear
seat audio system, if your vehicle has this
feature.
The RSE system always transmits the audio
signal to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” earlier in this
section for more information.
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to
the wired headphone jacks on the RSA system,
if your vehicle has this feature. The DVD
player can be selected as an audio source on the
RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on
page 370 for more information.
3. Press the display menu button again to
remove the setup menu from the screen.
363
While a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or
the radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle
has this feature, the rear seat passengers are able
to hear audio from the auxiliary device through
the wireless or wired headphones. The front seat
passengers are able to listen to playback from
this device through the vehicle speakers by
selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up
into its locked position.
Video Screen
The RSE overhead console contains the infrared
receivers for the wireless headphones and the
infrared receivers for the remote control. They are
located at the rear of the console.
The video screen is located in the RSE overhead
console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push the release button located on the RSE
overhead console.
2. move the screen to the desired position.
364
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its
locked position, the screen remains on, this is
normal, and the DVD continues to play through the
previous audio source. Use the remote control
power button or eject the disc to turn off the
screen.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for
more information.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console
and press the desired button. Direct sunlight
or very bright light could affect the ability of the
RSE transmitter to receive signals from the remote
control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of sight could
also affect the function of the remote control.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot,
the remote control power button can be used to
turn on the video screen display and start the disc.
The radio can also turn on the video screen
display. See Radio with CD and DVD (MP3) on
page 328 for more information.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight can damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a
new universal remote control can be purchased.
If this happens, make sure the universal
remote control uses a code set of Toshiba®.
Remote Control Buttons
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video
screen on and off.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the
remote control backlight on. The backlight
automatically times out after seven to ten seconds
if no other button is pressed.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to
the main menu of the DVD. This function could
vary for each disc.
365
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.
After making a selection press the enter button.
This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice
that is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust
the brightness, screen display mode (normal,
full, or zoom), and display the language menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button operates only when the display menu
or a DVD menu is active.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this
button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
366
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start
playing a DVD. Press this button while a DVD is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue
playing the DVD.
While the DVD is playing, the DVD can be played
slowly by pressing the pause button then
pressing the fast forward button. The DVD
continues playing in a slow play mode. Also,
reverse can be played slowly by pressing
the pause button and then pressing the fast
reverse button. To cancel slow play mode, press
the play/pause button.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button
to return to the start of the current track or
chapter. Press this button again to go to the
previous track or chapter. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go
to the beginning of the next chapter or track. This
button might not work while the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to quickly
reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing
a DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast
reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fast
reverse button. This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a
DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the
fast forward button. This button might not work
while the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this feature when
the DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function varies for each disc.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
source.
d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature while a
DVD is playing. The format and content of
this function varies for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or
track number selection.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds
after entering a numeric selection, to clear all
numerical inputs.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers greater than
nine. Press this button before entering the number.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options
when a DVD is playing. The format and content of
this function varies for each disc.
367
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the
following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the
remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure they are installed correctly using
the diagram on the inside of the remote
control.
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
368
Problem
No power.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned on or in accessory.
Check the display mode
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
menu button on the
remote control.
Check the auxiliary
input connections at
both devices.
The remote control does
Check to make sure there
not work.
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
the DVD starts where I left DVD player resumes
off and sometimes at the playing where the DVD
beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
Problem
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Recommended Action
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
I lost the remote and/or
See your dealer/retailer
the headphones.
for assistance.
The DVD is playing,
Check that the RSE video
but there is no picture
screen is sourced to the
or sound.
DVD player.
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message depends on the
radio that is in the vehicle. The video screen
can display one of the following:
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays
when there are disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the
disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side
up, or if the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the
disc is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no
disc is present when the EJECT button is pressed
on the radio.
369
DVD Distortion
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Video distortion can occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position
Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or
walkie talkies.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen
to and control any of the music sources: radio,
CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However,
the rear seat passengers can only control the
music sources the front seat passengers are not
listening to (except on some radios where
dual control is allowed). For example, rear seat
passengers can control a CD and listen to it
through the headphones, while the driver listens to
the radio through the front speakers. The rear
seat passengers have control of the volume
for each set of headphones.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near
the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water. Use care
when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as
damage could result.
The RSA functions can be used even while the
main radio is off.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones
(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
If your vehicle has this feature, audio can also
be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless
headphones.
Depending on the audio system, the rear speakers
may continue to play when the RSA audio is
active through the headphones.
370
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or
XM™ (if equipped), press the seek up or the seek
down arrow to go to the next or the previous
station or channels and stay there. This function is
inactive, with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold the seek up or seek down arrow
until the display flashes, to tune to an individual
station. The display stops flashing after the buttons
have not been pushed for more than two seconds.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if
the front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on
or off.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume of the wired headphones.
The left knob controls the left headphones and the
right knob controls the right headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped),
CD, and if your vehicle has these features,
DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
While listening to a disc, press the seek up
arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the
disc. Press the seek down arrow to go back to the
start of the current track or chapter (if more
than ten seconds have played). This function is
inactive, with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
While a DVD video menu is being displayed,
press the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to
perform a cursor up or down on the menu.
Hold the seek up arrow or seek down arrow to
perform a cursor right or left on the menu.
371
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the
next preset radio station or channel set on the
main radio. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio.
While a CD or DVD audio is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or
DVD audio. This function is inactive, with some
radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to
the CD or DVD audio.
While a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,
press this button to select the next disc, if
multiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the disc.
While a DVD video menu is being displayed,
press the PROG button to perform the menu
function, Enter.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it does not operate
and LOCKED displays.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has audio
steering wheel controls,
they could differ
depending on the
vehicle’s options. Some
audio controls can
be adjusted at
the steering wheel.
They include the
following:
xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio
station stored as a favorite.
372
While a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or the
down arrow to go to the next or previous track
or chapter.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release
this button to silence the vehicle speakers only.
The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if
your vehicle has these features, does not mute.
Press and release this button again, to turn
the sound on.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press
and hold this button briefly to initiate voice
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold
this button briefly to interact with the OnStar®
system. If your vehicle also has the navigation
system, press and hold this button briefly to initiate
voice recognition and say “OnStar” to enter
OnStar® mode. See the OnStar® System on
page 185 in this manual for more information.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped),
CD, and if your vehicle has these features,
DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the
next radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped). Press this button to go to the next
track or chapter while sourced to the CD or
DVD slot.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur
during normal radio reception if items such as cell
phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories,
and external electronic devices are plugged
into the accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the item from the
accessory power outlet.
373
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations
boosts the power levels during the day, and then
reduce these levels during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and power lines
interfere with radio reception. When this happens,
try reducing the treble on your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals
only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
374
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or through tunnels could
cause loss of the XM™ signal for a period of
time. The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL to
indicate interference.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens
of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the
CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car
washes without being damaged. If the mast should
ever become slightly bent, straighten it out by
hand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is
still tightened to its base. If tightening is required,
tighten by hand, then with a wrench
one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on
the roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of
snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.
A vehicle with a sunroof might not get the
best performance from the XM™ system if the
sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can
interfere with the performance of the XM™ system.
Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is
not obstructed.
375
✍ NOTES
376
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ... 378
Defensive Driving ...................................... 378
Drunken Driving ........................................ 379
Control of a Vehicle .................................. 382
Braking ...................................................... 382
Antilock Brake System (ABS) .................... 383
Braking in Emergencies ............................. 385
Locking Rear Axle ..................................... 385
StabiliTrak® System ................................... 385
Steering .................................................... 389
Off-Road Recovery .................................... 391
Passing ..................................................... 391
Loss of Control .......................................... 393
Off-Road Driving ........................................ 394
Driving at Night ......................................... 411
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 412
City Driving ............................................... 416
Freeway Driving ........................................ 417
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 418
Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 419
Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 420
Winter Driving ........................................... 422
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice, or Snow .......................................... 426
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 426
Recovery Hooks (Except SS Model) .......... 427
Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 428
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment .............................................. 435
Truck-Camper Loading Information ............ 439
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ............ 443
Towing ........................................................ 443
Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 443
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 443
Towing a Trailer ........................................ 449
Trailer Recommendations .......................... 490
377
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
Are for Everyone on page 22.
378
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one
contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink alcohol,
so they never drive after drinking. For persons
under 21, it is against the law in every U.S.
state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
379
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three double
martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of body
water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body
water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same
body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six
drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
380
But the ability to drive is affected well below a
BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows that
the driving skills of many people are impaired at a
BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that the
effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired
at BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics
show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of
having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is
12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the
chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or
number of cold showers will speed that up. “I will
be careful” is not the right answer. What if
there is an emergency, a need to take sudden
action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be
able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after
drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not
drink.
381
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide. That means
you can lose control of your vehicle. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 385.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 494.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 262.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to
bring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
382
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of
a second. But that is only an average. It might
be less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight all
play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition
of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; and the
amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. The brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic
following distances, you will eliminate a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking
and longer brake life.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your
vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 494.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
will help prevent a braking skid.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Antilock Brake
System Warning Light
on page 263.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP
problem, both the brake and ABS warning lights
come on accompanied by a 10-second chime. The
lights and chime will come on each time the
ignition is turned on until the problem is repaired.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
When you start the engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You might hear
a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
383
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make
the most of available tire and road conditions. This
can help you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
front wheel and at both rear wheels.
384
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or
always decrease stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not have
time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly
slows or stops. Always leave enough room up
ahead to stop, even though you have ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let antilock work for you.
You might feel the brakes vibrate or notice
some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear
axle can give you additional traction on snow, mud,
ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle
most of the time, but when one of the rear wheels
has no traction and the other does, this feature
will allow the wheel with traction to move the
vehicle.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may have the StabiliTrak® system
which combines antilock brake, traction and
stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most
driving conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic
checks to ensure there are no problems. You may
hear or feel the system working. This is normal and
does not mean there is a problem with your vehicle.
The system should initialize before the vehicle
reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). In some cases, it may
take approximately two miles of driving before the
system initializes.
385
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the
StabiliTrak® light along with one of the following
messages will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROL
OFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,
STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE STABILITRAK. If
these DIC messages appear, make sure the
StabiliTrak® system has not been turned off using
the StabiliTrak® on/off button. Then turn the
steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock
position to the three o’clock position. If this clears
the message(s), your vehicle does not need
servicing. If this does not clear the message(s),
then turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and then
turn it back on again to reset the system. If any
of these messages still appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), your vehicle should be
taken in for service. For more information on
the DIC messages, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 273.
386
The StabiliTrak® light
will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the system is
both on and activated.
You may also feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.
The traction control
disable button is located
on the instrument panel
below the climate
controls.
The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can be
turned off by pressing and releasing the
StabiliTrak® button if both systems (traction control
and StabiliTrak®) were previously on. To disable
both traction control and StabiliTrak®, press
and hold the button for five seconds.
Traction control and StabiliTrak® can be turned on
by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak® button if
not automatically shut off for any other reason.
When the TCS or StabiliTrak® system is turned off,
the StabiliTrak® light and the appropriate TCS
off or StabiliTrak® off message will be displayed on
the DIC to warn the driver. Your vehicle will still
have brake-traction control when traction control is
off, but will not be able to use the engine speed
management system. See “Traction Control
Operation” next for more information.
When the traction control system has been turned
off, you may still hear system noises as a result
of the brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for
normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to
“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also
be necessary to turn off the system when driving
in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 426.
When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability
system is automatically disabled, the StabiliTrak®
light will come on and the STABILITRAK OFF
message will appear on the DIC. Both traction
control and StabiliTrak® are automatically disabled
in this condition.
387
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the
StabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheel
spin by reducing engine power to the wheels
(engine speed management) and by applying
brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction
control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled
automatically when you start your vehicle. It will
activate and the StabiliTrak® light will flash if
it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction while driving. If you turn
off traction control, only the brake-traction
control portion of traction control will work. The
engine speed management will be disabled. In this
mode, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely.
This can cause the brake-traction control to
activate constantly.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to
spin excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS
and brake warning lights and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message are displayed, you
could damage the transfer case. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Reduce
engine power and do not spin the wheel(s)
excessively while these lights and this message
are displayed.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/
downshifts of the transmission. When this happens,
you may notice a reduction in acceleration, or may
hear a noise or vibration. This is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow you to use cruise
again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
Cruise Control on page 224.
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting
the vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer
for service.
388
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning, you
can steer but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable
speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires against the road
surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change
its path when you turn the front wheels. If there is
no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you have ever tried to steer a
vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of the tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one
factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 385.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you will want to go
slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 494.
389
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That
is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking
on page 382. It is better to remove as much speed
as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are
always possible is a good reason to practice
defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts
properly.
390
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you are driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane
as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief
surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put
the passing driver face to face with the worst of all
traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
391
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right
lane and do not get too close. Time your move
392
so you will be increasing speed as the time
comes to move into the other lane. If the way
is clear to pass, you will have a running
start that more than makes up for the distance
you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel
your pass, you need only slow down and drop
back again and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the blind
spot.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and
move back into the right lane. Remember that,
if your vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror
is convex, the vehicle you just passed may
seem to be farther away from you than it
really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle
too rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are
not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say
about what happens when the three
control systems — brakes, steering, and
acceleration — do not have enough friction where
the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the
acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 385. If the StabiliTrak® System is off,
then an acceleration skid is also best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
393
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off
the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the
way you want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid
if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.
For safety, you will want to slow down and adjust
your driving to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or
braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
394
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 382.
If your vehicle is an SS Model or does not
have four-wheel drive, you should not drive
off-road unless you are on a level, solid surface. If
your vehicle has 20-inch tire/wheel assemblies,
do not use your vehicle for off-road driving.
See Tires on page 558.
The airbag system is designed to work properly
under a wide range of conditions, including off-road
usage. Observe safe driving speeds, especially
on rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the
terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no road
signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to
nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide.
You will find many driving tips and suggestions.
These will help make your off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
If you think you will need some more ground
clearance at the front of your vehicle, you
can remove the front fascia lower air dam.
The front fascia lower air dam is held in place by
two bolts and 10 snap features. The bolts and snap
features are accessible from underneath the front
fascia.
The following steps must be performed on the
bolts and snap features to remove the air dam:
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
2. With a flat-blade screwdriver, push down on
the snap features and disengage the snaps.
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until
it is free.
When you are back on roads, though, be sure to
replace the air dam.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front fascia lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the
engine. Always be sure to replace the front
fascia air dam when you are finished off-road
driving.
To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
1. Line up the snap features and push the
air dam rearward to engage the snaps.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary
maintenance and service work done. Check to
make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
them, are properly attached. Be sure you read
all the information about your four-wheel-drive
vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the
spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up
where they should be? What are the local
laws that apply to off-roading where you will be
driving? If you do not know, you should check with
law enforcement people in the area. Will you be
on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to
get the necessary permission.
395
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher
than the seatbacks can be thrown
forward during a sudden stop. You or
your passengers could be injured.
Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can
be tossed about when driving over
rough terrain. You or your passengers
can be struck by flying objects.
Secure the cargo properly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the
vehicle’s center of gravity, making it
more likely to roll over. You can be
seriously or fatally injured if the
vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads
inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
396
There are some important things to remember
about how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load
floor and forward of your rear axle. Put
heavier items as far forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so
driving on the off-road terrain does not
toss things around.
You will find other important information in this
manual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428
and Tires on page 558.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and
satisfying recreation. However, it also raises
environmental concerns. We recognize these
concerns and urge every off-roader to follow these
basic rules for protecting the environment:
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas
that have been specially set aside for public
off-road recreational driving; obey all
posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all
refuse is removed from any campsite
before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or
other combustible materials that could
catch fire from the heat of the vehicle’s
exhaust system.
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when
going to a remote area. Know the terrain and
plan your route. You are much less likely to get
bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trails
and terrain. Try to learn of any blocked or
closed roads.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one
other vehicle. If something happens to one
of them, the other can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to
read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a
winch can be handy if you get stuck. But you will
want to know how to use it properly.
397
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the
wilderness. Off-road driving does require some new
and different driving skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.
Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep
the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears
need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.
With your arms, hands, feet, and body, you
will need to respond to vibrations and vehicle
bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control
your vehicle is to control your speed. Here are
some things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:
• You approach things faster and you have less
time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• You have less time to react.
• You have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.
• You will need more distance for braking,
especially since you are on an unpaved
surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing
and quick changes in direction can easily
throw you out of position. This could
cause you to lose control and crash. So,
whether you are driving on or off the road,
you and your passengers should wear
safety belts.
398
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different
kinds of terrain. You need to be familiar with
the terrain and its many different features. Here
are some things to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you
over hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affects
the steering, acceleration, and braking of your
vehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kind
of surface you are on, you may experience slipping,
sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration, poor
traction, and longer braking distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles
can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or
bump can startle you if you are not prepared for
them. Often these obstacles are hidden by
grass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up
ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects
later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain,
keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts,
troughs, or other surface features can jerk
the wheel out of your hands if you are not
prepared.
399
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other
obstacles, the wheels can leave the ground. If this
happens, even with one or two wheels, you
cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind
of alertness from driving on paved roads and
highways. There are no road signs, posted speed
limits, or signal lights. You have to use your
own good judgment about what is safe and what
is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on
any road. And this is certainly true for off-road
driving. At the very time you need special alertness
and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions,
and judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You could have a serious — or
even fatal — accident if you drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See Drunken Driving on page 379.
400
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or
across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good
judgment and an understanding of what your
vehicle can and cannot do. There are some hills
that simply cannot be driven, no matter how
well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any
vehicle. If you drive up them, you will
stall. If you drive down them, you cannot
control your speed. If you drive across
them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness, do not drive
the hill.
Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb,
descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper
as you near the top, but you may not see this
because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes,
grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will
the surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so
you will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can
block your path, such as boulders, trees, logs,
or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart
way to find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often
have ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks
because they are more susceptible to the
effects of erosion.
401
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to
maintain your speed. Do not use more power
than you need, because you do not want
the wheels to start spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
•
•
•
•
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can
be dangerous. You could lose traction,
slide sideways, and possibly roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed.
When driving up hills, always try to go
straight up.
402
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
Ease up on your speed as you approach the
top of the hill.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the
hill to let opposing traffic know you are there.
Use your headlamps even during the
day. They make your vehicle more visible to
oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full
speed can cause an accident. There could
be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even
another vehicle. You could be seriously
injured or killed. As you near the top of a
hill, slow down and stay alert.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or
is about to stall, and I cannot make it up
the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you
should do, and there are some things you
must not do. First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle
and keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply
the parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the
transmission to REVERSE (R), release the
parking brake, and slowly back down the hill in
REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will
need to restart it. With the brake pedal
pressed and the parking brake still applied,
shift the transmission to PARK (P) and restart
the engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R),
release the parking brake, and slowly back
down the hill as straight as possible in
REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left
hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock
position. This way, you will be able to tell
if your wheels are straight and maneuver as
you back down. It is best that you back
down the hill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning
the wheel too far to the left or right will
increase the possibility of a rollover.
Here are some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting
into NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine
and regain forward momentum. This will not
work. Your vehicle will roll backwards
very quickly and you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop
the vehicle. Then apply the parking brake.
Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking
brake, and slowly back straight down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about
to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep
enough to cause you to roll over if you turn
around. If you cannot make it up the hill, you
must back straight down the hill.
403
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just cannot do it. What
should I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission
in PARK (P), and turn off the engine. Leave
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the
uphill side and stay clear of the path the
vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not
shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL when
you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
404
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is
because the NEUTRAL position on the
transfer case overrides the transmission.
You or someone else could be injured. If
you are going to leave your vehicle, set the
parking brake and shift the transmission to
PARK (P). But do not shift the transfer case
to NEUTRAL. Leave the transfer case in the
Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel High or
Four-Wheel Low position.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want
to consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to
maintain vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom
with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then
try to keep your vehicle headed straight down, and
use a low gear. This way, engine drag can help
your brakes and they will not have to do all
the work. Descend slowly, keeping your vehicle
under control at all times.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a
serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly
when descending a hill and use a low
gear to keep vehicle speed under control.
405
Q: Are there some things I should not do
when driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you
ignore them you could lose control and
have a serious accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take
you across the incline of the hill. A hill that
is not too steep to drive down may be
too steep to drive across. You could roll over
if you do not drive straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work
and could overheat and fade.
406
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going
uphill. But if it happens going downhill, here is
what to do.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular
brakes. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking,
restart the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking
brake, and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and
get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go
across the incline of a hill. If this happens,
you have to decide whether to try to drive across
the incline. Here are some things to consider:
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep
will make your vehicle roll over. You could
be seriously injured or killed. If you have
any doubt about the steepness of the
incline, do not drive across it. Find
another route instead.
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down
may be too steep to drive across. When you go
straight up or down a hill, the length of the
wheel base — the distance from the front
wheels to the rear wheels — reduces the
likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.
But when you drive across an incline, the much
more narrow track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — may not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Also, driving across an incline puts more weight
on the downhill wheels. This could cause a
downhill slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when
you drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy
spots, or even wet grass can cause your tires
to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips
sideways, it can hit something that will trip
it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of
the incline even worse. If you drive across a
rock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill
wheels drop into a rut or depression, your
vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide
carefully whether to try to drive across an incline.
Just because the trail goes across the incline
does not mean you have to drive it. The last
vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
407
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that
is not too steep, but I hit some loose
gravel and start to slide downhill. What
should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide
sideways, turn downhill. This should help
straighten out the vehicle and prevent the side
slipping. However, a much better way to
prevent this is to get out and “walk the course”
so you know what the surface is like before
you drive it.
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is
dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you
could be crushed or killed. Always get out
on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and
stay well clear of the rollover path.
408
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an
incline, be sure you, and any passengers, get out
on the uphill side, even if the door there is
harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side
and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be
right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the
path the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, your
wheels will not get good traction. You cannot
accelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult, and
you will need longer braking distances. If your
vehicle has four-wheel drive, see Four-Wheel Drive
on page 154 for transfer case mode selection.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in
mud —the deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In
really deep mud, the idea is to keep your
vehicle moving so you do not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change
in wheel traction. But it will depend upon how
loosely packed the sand is. On loosely packed
sand, such as on beaches or sand dunes,
your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating, and braking.
Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire
traction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose
control. On wet ice, for example, the traction is
so poor that you will have difficulty accelerating.
And if you do get moving, poor steering and
difficult braking can cause you to slide out of
control.
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers
can be dangerous. Underwater springs,
currents under the ice, or sudden thaws
can weaken the ice. Your vehicle could
fall through the ice and you and your
passengers could drown. Drive your
vehicle on safe surfaces only.
409
Driving in Water
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your
vehicle downstream and you and your
passengers could drown. If it is only
shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you
could lose traction and roll the vehicle
over. Do not drive through rushing water.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive
through it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you
probably will not get through. Also, water that deep
can damage your axle and other vehicle parts.
410
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition
system and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also
occur if you get your tailpipe under water. And,
as long as your tailpipe is under water, you
will never be able to start your engine. When you
go through water, remember that when your
brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on
page 412 for more information on driving through
water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.
These accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake
linings cleaned and checked. These substances
can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the
body structure, steering, suspension, wheels,
tires, and exhaust system for damage. Also, check
the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service
due to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule for additional information.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
•
•
•
•
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you cannot see as well, slow down and
keep more space between you and other
vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They might cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
411
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
412
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On
a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or
turn as well because your tire-to-road traction is
not as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you
will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet
suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving
on dry pavement. If your vehicle has four-wheel
drive, see Four-Wheel Drive on page 154 for
transfer case mode selection.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
if your windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal
lightly until the brakes work normally.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield,
or when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect your
brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try
to slow down before you hit them.
413
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under your tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is wet
enough and you are going fast enough. When your
vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact
with the road.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can
come in through the engine’s air intake
and badly damage the engine. Never drive
through water that is slightly lower than the
underbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid
deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
414
Driving Through Flowing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried
away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If
this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
your parking lamps — to help make you more
visible to others.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
Tires on page 558.
415
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. You will want
to watch out for what the other drivers are doing
and pay attention to traffic signals.
416
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
energy. See Freeway Driving on page 417.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try
to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing
speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often
as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But
they have their own special rules.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your
speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if
it is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you
want to pass.
417
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then
use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make
certain you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your
speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After
driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may
tend to think you are going slower than you
actually are.
418
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If
you must start when you are not fresh — such
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out. Of
course, you will find experienced and able
service experts in GM dealerships all across North
America. They will be ready and willing to help
if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of the
tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the
rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make
you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,
your vehicle can leave the road in less than
a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your vehicle’s mirrors
and instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
419
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable. See
Off-Road Driving on page 394 for information
about driving off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all
fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
420
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine assist
the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You might see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
421
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You might want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet,
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide
traction. Be sure you properly secure these items
in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 558.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You have a lot less traction, or grip, and
need to be very careful.
422
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
can offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
StabiliTrak® improves your ability to accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. But you can turn
StabiliTrak® off if you ever need to. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 385 and If Your
Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 426. Even with StabiliTrak®, slow down and
adjust your driving to the road conditions.
Under certain conditions, you might want to turn
StabiliTrak® off, such as when driving through
deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on
page 383.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
can appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice
ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try
not to brake while you are actually on the
ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
423
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket
around you. If you do not have blankets
or extra clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to
keep warm.
424
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the
exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
You will need a well-charged battery to restart
the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
425
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want
to spin the wheels too fast. The method known as
rocking can help you get out when you are
stuck, but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or
others could be injured. And, the
transmission or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
426
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin
the wheels too fast while shifting the
transmission back and forth, you can destroy
the transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 584.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around the front wheels. If you have
a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into Four-Wheel
High. If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, you should
turn the system off. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 385. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the
wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion
that may free your vehicle. If that does not get your
vehicle out after a few tries, it may need to be towed
out. You can use the recovery hooks, if your vehicle
has them. If your vehicle does need to be towed
out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 443.
Recovery Hooks (Except SS Model)
Notice: SS Models have recovery hooks
that are concealed by the front bumper trim
covering. Use of the recovery hooks could
cause damage to your vehicle. If you have the
SS Model, do not use the recovery hooks.
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight
out. Never pull on the hooks at a
sideways angle. The hooks could break
off and you or others could be injured
from the chain or cable snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged
and it would not be covered by warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of
the vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place
where you can continue driving.
427
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
428
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The
tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
Tires on page 558 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 567.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing
a Trailer on page 449 for important information
on towing a trailer, towing safety rules and
trailering tips.
429
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
430
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Example 2
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
300 lbs (136 kg)
B
700 lbs (317 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The
label shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires
and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
431
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label also contains important
information about your Front Axle Reserve
Capacity. See “What is front axle reserve capacity,
and how do I calculate it?” under Adding a
Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 435.
{CAUTION:
In the case of a sudden stop or collision,
things carried in the bed of your truck
could shift forward and come into the
passenger area, injuring you and others. If
you put things in the bed of your truck,
you should make sure they are properly
secured.
432
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load
your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you
have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
{CAUTION:
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
CAUTION:
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving“ under Off-Road
Driving on page 394.
(Continued)
433
Two-Tiered Loading
Add-On Equipment
Depending on the model of your pick-up, you can
create an upper load platform by positioning
two or four 2 inches (5 cm) by 6 inches (15 cm)
wooden planks across the width of the pickup box.
The planks must be inserted in the pickup box
depressions. The length of the planks must allow
for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surface
on each end of the plank.
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you carry
inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle
before you buy and install the new equipment.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the
load is securely tied down to prevent it from
shifting. The load’s center of gravity should be
positioned in a zone over the rear axle. The zone
is located in the area between the front of each
wheel well and the rear of each wheel well.
The center of gravity height must not extend above
the top of the pickup box flareboard.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s
taillamp area must be properly marked according
to local laws and regulations.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
434
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
* Equipment
Ladder Rack and Cargo
Cross Toolbox and Cargo
Side Boxes and Cargo
Maximum Weight
750 lbs (340 kg)
400 lbs (181 kg)
250 lbs per side
(113 kg per side)
* The combined weight for all rail-mounted equipment
should not exceed 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment
Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle,
here are some things you will need to know:
Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow
plow prep package, adding a plow can
damage your vehicle, and the repairs would
not be covered by warranty. Unless your
vehicle was built to carry a snow plow, do not
add one to your vehicle. If your vehicle has
the snow plow prep package, called RPO VYU,
then the payload your vehicle can carry will
be reduced when a snow plow is installed.
Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front
or rear axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) are exceeded.
Q: How do I know if my vehicle can handle a
snow plow?
A: Some vehicles are built with a special snow
plow prep package, called RPO VYU. If your
vehicle has this option, you can add a plow to it,
provided certain weights, such as the weights
on the vehicle’s axles and the Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW), are not exceeded.
Q: How heavy can a snow plow safely be?
A: The plow your vehicle can carry depends on
•
•
•
•
many things, such as:
The options your vehicle came with, and the
weight of those options.
The weight and number of passengers you
intend to carry.
The weight of items you have added to your
vehicle, like a tool box or truck cap.
The total weight of any additional cargo you
intend to carry.
435
Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg)
snow plow. The total weight of all occupants and
cargo inside the cab should not exceed 300 lb
(135 kg). This means that you may only be able to
carry one passenger. But, even this may be too
much if you have got other equipment already
adding to the weight of your vehicle.
Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a
snow plow on your vehicle:
• Make sure the weight on the front and
rear axles does not exceed the axle rating
for each.
• For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers
must be carried, appropriate counter ballast
must be installed rear of the rear axle. Counter
ballast must be properly secured so it will
not move during driving.
• Follow the snow plow manufacturer’s
recommendations regarding rear ballast. Rear
ballast may be required to ensure a proper
front and rear weight distribution ratio,
even though the actual weight at the front axle
may be less than the front axle rating.
436
• The snow plow manufacturer or installer can
assist you in determining the amount of rear
ballast required, to help make sure your
snowplow/vehicle combination does not
exceed the GVW rating, the front and rear
axle ratings, and the front and rear weight
distribution ratio.
• The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW
rating.
Q: What is front axle reserve capacity, and
how do I calculate it?
A: Front axle reserve capacity is the difference
between your front Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) and the front axle weight of your
vehicle with full fuel and passengers. Basically,
it is the amount of weight you can add to
your front axle before reaching your
front GAWR.
The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle
can be found in the lower right corner of the
Certification/Tire label, as shown.
United States
Canada
In order to calculate the amount of weight any
front accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to
the front axle, use the following formula:
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is
adding to the front axle.
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the
front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
437
For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow
actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the
front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow
is 4 ft (122 cm) in front of the front axle and the
wheel base is 10 ft (305 cm), then:
W = 700 lb (318 kg)
A = 4 ft (122 cm)
W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 =
980 lbs (445 kg)
So, if your truck’s front axle reserve capacity is
more than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add
the snow plow without exceeding the front GAWR.
Q: What if I want to add heavier equipment
to my vehicle?
A: You can add heavier equipment on the front
of the vehicle if you compensate for it by
carrying fewer passengers, less cargo, or by
positioning cargo towards the rear. This
has the effect of reducing the load on the front.
However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
must never be exceeded.
438
{CAUTION:
On some vehicles that have certain front
mounted equipment, such as a snow
plow, it may be possible to load the front
axle to the front gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) but not have enough weight on
the rear axle to have proper braking
performance. If your brakes can not work
properly, you could have a crash. To help
your brakes work properly when a snow
plow is installed, always follow the snow
plow manufacturer or installer’s
recommendation for rear ballast to ensure
a proper front and rear weight distribution
ratio, even though the actual front weight
may be less than the front GAWR, and the
total vehicle weight is less than the gross
vehicle weight rating (GVWR). Maintaining
a proper front and rear weight distribution
ratio is necessary to provide proper
braking performance.
Q: What is total vehicle reserve capacity?
A: This is the difference between your GVWR and
the weight of your truck with full fuel and
passengers. It is the amount of weight you can
add to your vehicle before reaching your
GVWR. Keep in mind that reserve capacity
numbers are intended as a guide when
selecting the amount of equipment or cargo
your truck can carry. If you are unsure of your
vehicle’s front, rear, or total weight, go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your
dealer/retailer can also help you with this.
The total vehicle reserve capacity for your
vehicle can be found in the lower right corner
of the Certification/Tire label as shown
previously.
See your dealer/retailer for additional advice and
information about using a snow plow on your
vehicle. Also, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 428.
Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep
package also have an emergency roof lamp
provision package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the
emergency roof lamp is provided above the
overhead console. See Auxiliary Roof Mounted
Lamp on page 231 for switch location.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
Notice: Installing a truck-camper to a
vehicle that is equipped with the SS trim
package could damage the vehicle. Do not
install a truck-camper on a vehicle equipped
with the SS trim package.
A vehicle specific Truck-Camper Loading
information label is attached to the inside of your
vehicle’s glove box. This label will tell you if
your vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how
much of a load your vehicle can carry, and how to
correctly spread out the load. Also, it will help
you match the right slide-in camper to your vehicle.
439
When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo
load of your vehicle is the weight of the camper,
plus the following:
• Everything else added to the camper after it
left the factory
• Everything in the camper
• All the people inside
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It
does not include the weight of the people inside.
But, you can figure about 150 lbs (68 kg) for
each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle’s CWR.
Refer to the Truck-Camper Loading Information
label in the glove box for dimensions A and B as
shown in the following illustration.
440
Use the rear edge of the load floor for
measurement purposes. The recommended
location for the cargo center of gravity is at
point C for the CWR. It is the point where the
mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended
at that point, would balance the front and rear.
Here is an example of proper truck and camper
match:
The total cargo load should not exceed the truck’s
cargo weight rating and the camper’s center of
gravity (A) should fall within the truck’s
recommended center of gravity zone (B) when
installed.
You must weigh any accessories or other
equipment that you add to your vehicle. Then,
subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This extra
weight may shorten the center of gravity zone of
your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.
A. Camper Center of Gravity
B. Recommended Center of Gravity Location Zone
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper,
the total cargo load of the truck consists of the
manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of
installed additional camper equipment not included
in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the
weight of camper cargo, and the weight of
passengers in the camper.
If your slide-in camper and its load weighs
less than the CWR, the center of gravity zone for
your vehicle may be larger.
Your dealer can help you make a good
vehicle-camper match and help you determine
the CWR.
441
After you have loaded your vehicle and camper,
drive to a weigh station and weigh the front
and rear wheels separately. This will tell you the
loads on the axles. The loads on the front and rear
axles should not be more than either of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of
the axle loads should not be more than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The total of the axle loads should not exceed your
vehicle’s gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR).
These ratings are given on the vehicle certification
label attached to the rear edge of the driver’s
door. See “Certification/Tire Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 428. If weight ratings are
exceeded, move or remove items to bring all
weights below the ratings.
Open the driver’s door and look at the
Certification/Tire label to find out your vehicle’s
GAWRs and GVWR.
When you install and load your slide-in camper,
check the manufacturer’s instructions.
If your vehicle has gone over the weight ratings,
move or take out some things until all the
weight falls below the ratings.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that
could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the
truck-camper is loaded, drive to a scale and
weigh on the front and on the rear wheels
separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle
loads should not exceed either of the gross
axle weight ratings (GAWR).
442
If you want more information on curb weights,
cargo weights, Cargo Weight Rating and the
correct center of gravity zone for your vehicle, your
dealer can help you. Just ask for a copy of
“Consumer Information, Truck-Camper Loading.”
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
Recreational Vehicle Towing
We are aware that some vehicle owners might
consider having the pickup box removed and
a commercial or recreational body installed.
Owners should be aware that, as manufactured,
there are differences between a chassis cab and a
pickup with the box removed which could affect
vehicle safety. The components necessary
to adapt a pickup to permit its safe use with a
specialized body should be installed by the body
builder.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy
towing, towing your vehicle will all four wheels
on the ground, and dolly towing, towing your
vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two
wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”.
Towing
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing
service if you need to have your disabled vehicle
towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 658.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
443
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on
a Long Trip on page 418.
444
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain
components could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Do not
tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed
with all four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions
for internal lubrication while being towed.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or
others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 154 for the
proper procedure to select the neutral position
for your vehicle.
6. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the towing vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition off and leave the steering
column unlocked.
445
Dolly Towing
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the
Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground, the
transmission could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Never
tow your vehicle with the rear wheels on the
ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed
with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions
for internal lubrication while being towed.
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, you must
tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the
dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
Ground)” later in this section for more information.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow dolly.
446
{CAUTION:
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
Ground)
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or
others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 154 for the
proper procedure to select the neutral position
for your vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the towing vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition off and lock the steering
column.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle
from the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 169.
3. Put the transmission in PARK (P).
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the
tow vehicle. Make sure the wheels are straight
before towing.
Use an adequate clamping device to ensure
that the front wheels are locked into the
straight position.
5. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the tow vehicle.
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
447
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle
from the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 169.
3. Put the transmission in PARK (P).
4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the
tow vehicle.
Use an adequate clamping device to ensure
that the front wheels are locked into the
straight position.
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s
transfer case into NEUTRAL can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or
others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 154.
6. Release the parking brake only after the
vehicle being towed is firmly attached to
the tow vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
448
Towing a Trailer
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the
DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New
Vehicle Break-In on page 139 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all
the steps in this section. Ask your dealer
for advice and information about towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result in costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. To pull a
trailer correctly, follow the advice in this
part, and see your dealer for important
information about towing a trailer with your
vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle
by itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration,
braking, handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
449
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you’ll be driving. A
good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that
you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.
This helps your engine and other parts of
your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to
shift the transmission to THIRD (3), or
FOURTH (4) with the Allison or Hydra-matic
6-speed transmissions, or if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too
450
often, such as under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions. See Tow/Haul Mode Light on
page 272.
Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/Haul Mode
Press this button at the
end of the shift lever to
enable/disable the
tow/haul mode.
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. See
Tow/Haul Mode on page 152 for more information.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when
the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at
least 75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross Combined
Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the
Trailer” later in the section. Tow/Haul is most
useful under the following driving conditions:
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large
or heavy load through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or
heavy load in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or
heavy load in busy parking lots where
improved low speed control of the vehicle is
desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly
loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause
damage. However, there is no benefit to the
selection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle is
unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded may
result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on
your vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
451
Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle
model and options.
C-1500 Regular Cab
Standard Box (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.23
4,800 lbs (2 177 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
3.73
5,300 lbs (2 404 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
3.23
5,200 lbs (2 359 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
4.8L V8
3.73
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
3.42
7,200
lbs
(3
266
kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
5.3L V8
3.73
8,200 lbs (3 719 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
maximum.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
4.3L V6
C-1500 Extended Cab
Standard Box (2WD)*
4.3L V6
4.8L V8
5.3L V8
452
Axle Ratio
3.23
3.73
3.23
3.73
3.42
3.73
Maximum Trailer Weight
4,300 lbs
4,800 lbs
4,700 lbs
6,700 lbs
6,700 lbs
7,700 lbs
(1 950 kg)
(2 177 kg)
(2 132 kg)
(3 039 kg)
(3 039 kg)
(3 493 kg)
GCWR+
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
C-1500 Extended Cab
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR+
Standard Box (2WD)*
6.0L V8
3.73
8,800 lbs (3 992 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.0L V8**
3.73
10,300 lbs (4 717 kg)
15,500 lbs (7 031 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
maximum.
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailer rating limited to 6,800 lbs (3 084 kg) except with 6000 V8 engine limited to
6,900 lbs (3 130 kg).
**NHT Enhanced Trailering Performance Package required.
+The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
C-1500 Extended Cab
Short Box (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.23
4,400 lbs (1 196 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
3.73
4,900 lbs (2 223 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
3.23
4,800 lbs (2 177 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
4.8L V8
3.73
6,800 lbs (3 084 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 448 kg)
3.42
6,800
lbs
(3
084
kg)
12,000
lbs (5 448 kg)
5.3L V8
3.73
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 902 kg)
6.0L V8
3.73
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
4.3L V6
453
C-1500 Crew Cab Short
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR+
Box (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
3.23
4,600 lbs (2 086 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
4.8L V8
3.73
6,600 lbs (2 994 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
3.42
6,600
lbs
(2
994
kg)
12,000
lbs (5 443 kg)
5.3L V8
3.73
7,600 lbs (3 447 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
6.0L V8
3.73
8,700 lbs (3 946 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.0L V8**
3.73
10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)
15,500 lbs (7 031 kg)
*This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
**NHT Enhanced Trailering Performance Package required.
+The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
C-1500 Regular Cab
Long Box (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.23
4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
3.73
5,200 lbs (2 359 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
3.23
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
4.8L V8
3.73
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 448 kg)
3.42
7,000
lbs
(3
175
kg)
12,000
lbs (5 443 kg)
5.3L V8
3.73
8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
maximum.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
4.3L V6
454
C-1500 Extended Cab
Long Box (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.42
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
3.73
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
maximum.
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailer rating limited to 7,600 lbs (3 447 kg).
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
5.3L V8
K-1500 Regular Cab
Standard Box (4WD)*
4.3L V6
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
5,100 lbs (2 313 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
3.42
5,900
lbs
(2
676
kg)
11,000
lbs (4 989 kg)
4.8L V8
4.10
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 902 kg)
3.73
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)
5.3L V8
4.10
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
maximum.
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailer rating limited to 7,300 lbs (3 311 kg).
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
455
K-1500 Extended Cab
Standard Box (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR+
3.42
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 989 kg)
4.10
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
3.73
7,500
lbs
(3
402
kg)
13,000
lbs (5 897 kg)
5.3L V8
4.10
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.0L V8
3.73
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.0L V8**
4.10
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
16,000 lbs (6 257 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
maximum.
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailer rating limited to 6,900 lbs (3 130 kg) except with 6000 V8 engine which has
sufficient payload for any fifth wheel/gooseneck trailering.
**NHT Enhanced Trailering Performance Package required.
+The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
4.8L V8
K-1500 Extended Cab
Short Box (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.42
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 989 kg)
4.10
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
3.73
7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
5.3L V8
4.10
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.0L V8
3.73
8,600 lbs (3 9015 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
4.8L V8
456
K-1500 Crew Cab Short Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR+
Box (4WD)*
3.42
5,400 lbs (2 449 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 989 kg)
4.8L V8
4.10
7,400 lbs (3 356 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
3.73
7,500
lbs
(3
402
kg)
13,000
lbs (5 897 kg)
5.3L V8
4.10
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.0L V8
3.73
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
6.0L V8**
4.10
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
16,000 lbs (6 257 kg)
6.2L V8
3.42
8,500 lbs (3 855 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
**NHT Enhanced Trailering Performance Package required.
+The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
K-1500 Regular Cab
Long Box (4WD)*
4.3L V6
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
4,800 lbs (2 177 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
3.42
5,900
lbs
(2
676
kg)
11,000
lbs (4 989 kg)
4.8L V8
4.10
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)
3.73
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)
5.3L V8
4.10
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
maximum.
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailer rating limited to 8,300 lbs (3 765 kg).
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
457
K-1500 Extended Cab
Long Box (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 896 kg)
4.10
8,300 lbs (3 765 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
*This vehicle has insufficient payload for fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailering.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
5.3L V8
C-2500 Extended
Cab Standard
Box HD (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,700 lbs (5 761 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin tongue weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to
3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
458
C-2500 Crew
Cab Standard
Box HD (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
C-2500 Regular Cab
Long Box HD (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,900 lbs (5 851 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin tongue weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to
3,000 lbs (1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer ratings above 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) require a fifth-wheel or gooseneck hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
459
C-2500 Extended Cab
Long Box HD (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
C-2500 Crew Cab Long
Box HD (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
9,900 lbs (4 490 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,400 lbs (5 624 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
460
K-2500 Extended
Cab Standard
Box HD (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
9,900 lbs (4 490 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,400 lbs (5 624 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
K-2500 Crew
Cab Standard
Box HD (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,300 lbs (5 579 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
461
K-2500 Regular Cab
Long Box HD (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,700 lbs (5 761 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
K-2500 Extended Cab
Long Box HD (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
462
K-2500 Crew Cab Long
Box HD (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
9,600 lbs (4 354 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,100 lbs (5 488 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
C-3500 Regular
Cab (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
10,100 lbs (4 581 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,600 lbs (5 715 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
463
C-3500 Extended
Cab (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear
3.73
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
Wheels)
4.10
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
C-3500 Crew
Cab (2WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
9,600 lbs (4 354 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,100 lbs (5 488 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear
3.73
9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
Wheels)
4.10
11,800 lbs (5 352 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
464
K-3500 Regular
Cab (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
9,900 lbs (4 490 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,400 lbs (5 624 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear
3.73
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
Wheels)
4.10
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
K-3500 Extended
Cab (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear
3.73
9,200 lbs (4 173 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
Wheels)
4.10
11,700 lbs (5 307 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
465
K-3500 Crew
Cab (4WD)*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
3.73
9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.10
11,800 lbs (5 352 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0L V8 (Dual Rear
3.73
9,100 lbs (4 128 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
Wheels)
4.10
11,600 lbs (5 262 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
*Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) maximum.
*Trailer rating limited to 13,000 lbs (5 897 kg) with weight distributing hitch.
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
6.0L V8
Ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on
page 656 for more information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers
or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
466
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 428 for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be
15 to 25 percent of the trailer weight up to the
maximum amount specified in the trailering chart
for your vehicle. See “Weight of the Trailer”,
and “Fifth-Wheel and Gooseneck Trailering” in this
section.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) for the 1500 or
2500 series, and up to a maximum of 750 lbs
(340 kg) for the 2500 HD or 3500 series with a
weight carrying hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A)
should be 10 percent to 15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight, up to a maximum of 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) for the 1500 series and up to a maximum
of 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for the 2500, 2500 HD or
3500 series with a weight distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue
weight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch
extension that will position the hitch ball closest
to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect
of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.
After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they are not, you may be
able to get them right by moving some items
around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot
cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional
weight may reduce your trailering capacity more
than the total of the additional weight.
467
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle
and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It
has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR
of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross
Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs
(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and
because the weight is applied well behind the rear
axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater than
just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much.
The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs
(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rear
axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg).
468
This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR
as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs
(3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with
some of the latest options and you have a front
seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with
some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.
You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front
axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle
weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity
to stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may
go further and think you must limit tongue weight
to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid
exceeding GVWR.
But, you must still consider the effect on the rear
axle. Because your rear axle now weighs
3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding
RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about
1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs
(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to
handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent
of total loaded trailer weight, you can expect
that the largest trailer your vehicle can properly
handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
your vehicle and trailer.
Hitches
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers
on the Certification label at the rear edge of the
driver’s door or see Loading Your Vehicle for more
information. Then be sure you don’t go over the
GVW limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including
the weight of the trailer tongue. If you use a
weight distributing hitch, make sure you don’t go
over the rear axle limit before you apply the weight
distribution spring bars.
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right
hitch.
469
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is
ample room when turning to avoid contact between
the trailer and the bumper.
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded,
will weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure
to use a properly mounted weight-distributing
hitch and sway control of the proper size.
This equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when driving. Always
use a sway control if the trailer will weigh
more than these limits. You can ask a hitch dealer
about sway controls.
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailering
A: Body to Ground Distance
B: Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch
must be adjusted so the distance (A) remains
the same both before and after coupling the trailer
to the tow vehicle.
470
Fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers can be
used with many pickup models. These trailers
place a larger percentage of the weight (kingpin
weight) on the tow vehicle than conventional
trailers. Make sure this weight does not cause the
vehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.
Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be
15 to 25 percent of the trailer weight up to the
maximum amount specified in the trailering chart
for your vehicle. See “Weight of the Trailer” in
this section for more information.
The hitch should be located in the pickup bed so
that it’s centerline is over or slightly in front of the
rear axle. Take care that it is not so far forward that
it will contact the back of the cab in sharp turns.
This is especially important for short box pickups.
Trailer pin box extensions and sliding fifth wheel
hitch assemblies can help this condition. There
should be at least six inches of clearance between
the top of the pickup box and the bottom of the
trailer shelf that extends over the box.
Make sure the hitch is attached to the tow vehicle
frame rails. Do not use the pickup box for
support.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety
chains under the tongue of the trailer to help
prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
If you are towing a trailer up to 5,000 lbs (2 271 kg)
with a factory-installed step bumper, you may
attach the safety chains to the attaching points on
the bumper. If you are towing a trailer up to
your vehicle’s trailer rating limit you may attach
the safety chains to the attaching point on the hitch
platform. If you are towing with an aftermarket
hitch follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they
must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be
able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
your trailer cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic
brake system.
471
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your
vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise,
both braking systems won’t work well. You
could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake
tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends the fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use
copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bend
and finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System
Your vehicle may have
an Integrated Trailer
Brake Control (ITBC)
system for electric trailer
brakes.
472
This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake
Control Panel on vehicles with an Integrated
Trailer Brake Control System. The power output to
the trailer brakes is based on the amount of
brake pressure being applied by your vehicle’s
brake system. This available power output to the
trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range
of trailering situations.
The ITBC system is integrated with your vehicle’s
brake, anti-lock brake and StabiliTrak® (if equipped)
systems. In trailering conditions that cause your
vehicle’s anti-lock brake or StabiliTrak® systems to
activate, power sent to the trailer’s brakes will be
automatically adjusted to minimize trailer wheel
lock-up. This does not imply that your trailer has the
StabiliTrak® system.
If your vehicle’s brake, anti-lock brake or
StabiliTrak® systems are not functioning properly,
your ITBC system may not be fully functional
or may not function at all. Make sure all of these
systems are fully operational to ensure full
functionality of the ITBC system.
The ITBC system is powered through your
vehicle’s electrical system. Turning the ignition off
will also turn off the ITBC system. The ITBC
system is fully functional only when the ignition is
in ON or in RUN.
The ITBC system can only be used with trailers
with electric brakes.
{CAUTION:
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible
with the ITBC system may result in
reduced or complete loss of trailer
braking. There may be an increase in
stopping distance or trailer instability
which could result in personal injury or
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other
property. An aftermarket controller may be
available for use with trailers with surge,
air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
systems. To determine the type of brakes
on your trailer and the availability of
controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
When trailering, make sure of the following:
• The ITBC system is used only with trailers that
are equipped with electric brakes.
• All applicable local and federal laws and
regulations are followed.
• All electrical and mechanical connections to
the trailer are made correctly.
• The trailer’s brakes are in proper working
condition.
• The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for
the towing condition.
The ITBC system is a factory installed item.
Out-of-factory installation of this system should not
be attempted. GM is not responsible for warranty
or performance of the system resulting from
out-of-factory installation.
473
Trailer Brake Control Panel
A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
474
The ITBC system has a control panel located on
the instrument panel to the left of the steering
column. See Instrument Panel Overview
(Base/Uplevel version) on page 212 or Instrument
Panel Overview (Premium version) on page 215
for more information on location. The control panel
allows you to adjust the amount of output,
referred to as trailer gain, available to the electric
trailer brakes and allows you to manually apply
the trailer brakes. The Trailer Brake Control Panel
is used along with the Trailer Brake Display
Page on the DIC to adjust and display power
output to the trailer brakes.
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
The ITBC system displays messages into the
vehicle’s Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 285 for more
information.
The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting,
power output to the electric trailer brakes, trailer
connection and system operational status.
The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed
by performing any of the following actions:
• Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using
the odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle
Information button (if equipped).
• Pressing a Trailer Gain button – If the Trailer
Brake Display Page is not currently displayed,
pressing a Trailer Gain button will first
recall the current Trailer Gain setting. After the
Trailer Brake Display Page is displayed,
subsequent depressions of the gain buttons
will then cause the Trailer Gain setting to
change.
• Activating the Manual Trailer Brake Apply
lever
• Connecting a trailer equipped with electric
trailer brakes
All DIC warning and service messages must first
be acknowledged by the driver before the
Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed and
Trailer Gain can be adjusted.
A. Trailer Gain Setting
B. Power Output to Trailer Brakes
C. No trailer with electric brakes connected or fault
present
475
TRAILER GAIN – This setting is displayed
anytime the Trailer Brake Display Page is active.
This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0
with either a trailer connected or disconnected. To
adjust the Trailer Gain, press one of the Trailer
Gain adjustment buttons located on the Trailer
Brake Control Panel. Press and hold a gain button
to cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust.
To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the
Trailer Gain setting to 0.0 (zero).
0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default setting. To
properly adjust trailer gain, see the Trailer
Gain Adjustment Procedure later in this section.
TRAILER OUTPUT – This is displayed any time a
trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output to
the electric brakes is based on the amount of
vehicle braking present and relative to the Trailer
Gain setting. Output is displayed from 0 to 10 bars
for each gain setting.
476
The Trailer Output will indicate “- - - - - -“ on the
Trailer Brake Display Page whenever the following
occur:
• No trailer is connected.
• A trailer without electric brakes is connected
(no DIC message is displayed).
• A trailer with electric brakes has become
disconnected (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed on the DIC).
• There is a fault present in the wiring to
the electric trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILER
WIRING message will also be displayed on
the DIC).
• There is a fault in the ITBC system (a
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM
message will also be displayed in the DIC).
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is located on
the Trailer Brake Control Panel and is used to apply
the trailer’s electric brakes independent of your
vehicle’s brakes. This lever is used in the Trailer
Gain Adjustment Procedure to properly adjust the
power output to the trailer brakes. Sliding the lever
to the left will apply only the trailer brakes. The
power output to the trailer is indicated in the Trailer
Brake Display Page in the DIC. If your vehicle’s
service brakes are applied while using the Manual
Trailer Brake Apply Lever, the trailer output power
will be the greater of the two.
Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering
condition and must be adjusted any time
vehicle loading, trailer loading or road surface
conditions change.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come
on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer
brakes are applied.
Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the
best trailer stopping performance. A trailer that
is over-gained may result in locked trailer brakes.
A trailer that is under-gained may result in not
enough trailer braking. Both of these conditions
may result in poorer stopping and stability of
the vehicle and trailer.
Use the following procedure to correctly adjust
Trailer Gain for each towing condition:
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper
working condition.
2. Connect a properly loaded trailer to the
vehicle and make all necessary mechanical
and electrical connections. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 428 for more information.
477
3. After the electrical connection is made to a
trailer equipped with electric brakes:
• A TRAILER CONNECTED message will be
briefly displayed on the DIC display.
• The Trailer Brake Display Page will appear
on the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN and
TRAILER OUTPUT.
• In the Trailer Output display on the
DIC, “- - - - - -“ will disappear if there is no
error present. Connecting a trailer without
electric brakes will not clear the six dashed
lines.
4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using the gain
adjustment (+ / -) buttons on the Trailer
Brake Control Panel.
5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a
level road surface representative of the towing
condition and free of traffic at about 20 to
25 mph (32 to 40 km/h) and fully apply
the Manual Trailer Brake Apply lever.
478
Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than
20 to 25 mph (32 to 40 km/h) may result in an
incorrect gain setting.
6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just below the point
of trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer
wheel squeal or puffs of tire smoke when
a trailer wheel locks.
Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing
a heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust
the Trailer Gain to the highest allowable
setting for the towing condition.
7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle
loading, trailer loading or road surface
conditions change or if you notice trailer wheel
lock-up at any time while you are towing
Other ITBC Related DIC Messages
In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and
TRAILER OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer
connection and ITBC system status is displayed in
the DIC.
TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will be
briefly displayed when a trailer with electric brakes
is first connected to the vehicle. This message
will automatically turn off in about ten seconds.
The driver can also acknowledge this message
before it automatically turns off.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will be
displayed if:
1. The ITBC system first determines connection
to a trailer with electric brakes and then the
trailer harness becomes disconnected
from the vehicle.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
stationary, this message will automatically turn
off in about thirty seconds. This message
will also turn off if the driver acknowledges this
message off or if the trailer harness is
re-connected.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
moving, this message will continue until the
ignition is turned off. This message will also
turn off if the driver acknowledges this message
off or if the trailer harness is re-connected.
2. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the
electric trailer brakes. This message will
continue as long as there is an electrical fault in
the trailer wiring. This message will also turn off
if the driver acknowledges this message off.
479
To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle
side or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness
connection, do the following:
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the
vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. Wait ten seconds, then turn the ignition back
to RUN.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message
re-appears, the electrical fault is on the
vehicle side.
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message
only re-appears when you connect the trailer
wiring harness to the vehicle, the electrical
fault is on the trailer side.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – This
message will be displayed when there is a problem
with the ITBC system. If this message persists
over multiple ignition cycles there is problem with
the ITBC system. Take your vehicle to an
authorized GM dealer to have the ITBC system
diagnosed and repaired.
480
If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message is
displayed while you are driving your vehicle,
you no longer have power available to your trailer
brakes. When traffic conditions allow, carefully
pull your vehicle over to the side of the road and
turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection
to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If either
of these messages continues, either your
vehicle or your trailer needs service.
An authorized GM dealer may be able to diagnose
and repair problems with your trailer. However,
any diagnosis and repair of your trailer is not
covered under your GM Warranty. Please contact
your trailer dealer for assistance with trailer
repairs and trailer warranty information.
Driving with a Trailer
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
If you have a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It
can cause unconsciousness or death. See
Engine Exhaust on page 173. To maximize
your safety when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected
for leaks, and make necessary repairs
before starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
through a window in the rear or
another opening, drive with your front,
main heating or cooling system on
and with the fan on any speed. This
will bring fresh, outside air into your
vehicle. Do not use the climate control
setting for maximum air because it
only recirculates the air inside your
vehicle. See Climate Control System
(With Air Conditioning ) on page 240
or Climate Control System (Heater
Only) on page 243.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
481
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure the brakes are working.
This lets you check your electrical connection at
the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
While towing a trailer or when exposed to long
periods of sunshine, the floor of the truck bed may
become very warm. Avoid putting items in the
truck bed that might be affected by high ambient
temperatures.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
482
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead
when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a
good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move
that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right,
move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while
trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer
won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,
trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change.
Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you’re about to
turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs
on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think
drivers behind you are seeing your signal when
they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
don’t shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode
if the transmission shifts too often. See Tow/Haul
Mode Light on page 272.
When towing at high elevation on steep uphill
grades, consider the following: Engine coolant at
higher elevations will boil at a lower temperature
than at or near sea level. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high
elevation on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may
show signs similar to engine overheating. To
avoid this, let the engine run while parked,
preferably on level ground, with the transmission
in PARK (P) at least five minutes before turning the
engine off. If you do get the overheat warning,
see Engine Overheating on page 523.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift
the transmission to lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions).
483
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle,
with a trailer attached, on a hill. If
something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and
both your vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
484
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the
load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL.
6. Release the regular brakes.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle
will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, use the steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake
firmly set.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• Start your engine
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
If the transfer case on four-wheel-drive
vehicles is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will
be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is
in a drive gear — not in NEUTRAL.
485
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Basic Trailer Wiring
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you’re pulling a trailer. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 633 for
more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle
lubricant, belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and
the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re
trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
All regular, extended cab and crew cab pickups
have a seven-wire trailer towing harness.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with one of the following
wiring harnesses for towing a trailer or hauling
a slide-in camper.
486
For vehicles not equipped with heavy duty
trailering, the harness is clipped to the vehicle’s
frame behind the spare tire mount. The harness
requires the installation of a trailer connector,
which is available through your dealer.
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a
standard four-way round pin connector, you can
also get an adapter from your dealer.
Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Harness
Package
For vehicles equipped with heavy duty trailering,
the harness is connected to a bracket on the hitch
platform. The seven-wire harness contains the
following trailer circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
•
•
•
•
•
•
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in
the underhood electrical center, but the wires
are not connected. They should be connected by
your dealer or a qualified service center. The
fuse and wire for the ITBC is factory installed and
connected if the vehicle is equipped with an
ITBC. The fuse for the battery feed is not required
if your vehicle has an auxiliary battery. If your
vehicle does not have an auxiliary battery, have
your dealer or authorized service center install the
required fuse.
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,
press the tow/haul mode button located at the
end of the shift lever. This will boost the vehicle
system voltage and properly charge the battery. If
the trailer is too light for tow/haul mode, you
can turn on the headlamps as a second way to
boost the vehicle system and charge the battery.
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed*
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
487
Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring Package
The seven-wire camper harness is located
under the front edge of the pickup box on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, attached to the frame
bracket. A connector will have to be added to
the wiring harness which connects to the camper.
The harness contains the following camper/trailer
circuits:
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
488
If your vehicle is equipped with the “Heavy-Duty
Trailering” option, please refer to “Heavy-Duty
Trailer Wiring Package” earlier in this section.
When the camper-wiring harness is ordered
without the heavy-duty trailering package, an
eight-wire harness with a seven-pin connector is
located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to the
vehicle’s frame.
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
These wiring provisions are included with your
vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These
provisions are for an electric brake controller.
The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near
the data link connector for the trailer brake
controller. The harness contains the following
wires:
• Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector
• Red/Black: Battery
• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
• White: Ground
It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified
service center.
If your vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt
cuts exist, but are not connected further in the
harness. If you install an aftermarket trailer brake
controller, the ITBC must be disconnected. Do
not power both ITBC and aftermarket controllers to
control the trailer brakes at the same time.
Auxiliary Battery
The auxiliary battery provision can be used to
supply electrical power to additional equipment that
you may choose to add, such as a slide-in
camper. If your vehicle has this provision, this
relay will be located on the driver’s side of
the vehicle, next to the underhood electrical center.
489
Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions
that are included with any electrical equipment
that you install.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
turn off electrical equipment when not in
use and do not use equipment that exceeds
the maximum amperage rating for the auxiliary
battery provision.
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle,
only use it when your vehicle is stationary or
anchored.
490
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR
for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the
trailer attached, so that you won’t go over
the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using a
weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without
the spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out
the weight of your load the right way, and if
you choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer
on page 449.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ........................................................ 494
Accessories and Modifications ................... 494
California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 495
Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 495
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .......................................... 496
Fuel ............................................................. 496
Gasoline Octane ........................................ 497
Gasoline Specifications .............................. 497
California Fuel ........................................... 497
Additives ................................................... 498
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ............................ 499
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 500
Filling the Tank ......................................... 500
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 503
Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 504
Hood Release ........................................... 504
Engine Compartment Overview .................. 506
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) .................... 508
Engine Oil Life System .............................. 511
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(Gasoline Engines) ................................. 513
Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 516
Engine Coolant .......................................... 520
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............ 523
Engine Overheating ................................... 523
Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode (V8 Engines Only) ........................ 526
Cooling System ......................................... 527
Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 532
Power Steering Fluid ................................. 532
Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 533
Brakes ...................................................... 535
Battery ...................................................... 539
Jump Starting ............................................ 540
Rear Axle .................................................... 546
Four-Wheel Drive ........................................ 548
Front Axle ................................................... 550
491
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Noise Control System ................................. 551
Tampering with Noise Control System
Prohibited .............................................. 551
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 552
Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 552
Headlamps ................................................ 552
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp .................... 553
Pickup Box Identification and Fender
Marker Lamps ........................................ 554
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ...................................... 555
License Plate Lamp ................................... 556
Replacement Bulbs ................................... 557
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 557
Tires ............................................................ 558
Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 560
Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 564
492
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 567
Dual Tire Operation ................................... 568
Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 569
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 574
When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 577
Buying New Tires ...................................... 578
Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 580
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 581
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 582
Wheel Replacement .................................. 582
Tire Chains ............................................... 584
If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 585
Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 586
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 588
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ....................................... 592
Secondary Latch System ........................... 598
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 602
Spare Tire ................................................. 606
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ........................................ 607
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 607
Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 608
Leather ...................................................... 609
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 610
Care of Safety Belts .................................. 610
Weatherstrips ............................................ 610
Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 611
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 611
Finish Care ............................................... 611
Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 612
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim ................................................ 613
Tires ......................................................... 614
Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 614
Finish Damage .......................................... 614
Underbody Maintenance ............................ 614
Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 615
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 615
Vehicle Identification .................................. 616
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 616
Service Parts Identification Label ............... 617
Electrical System ........................................ 617
Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 617
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 617
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................. 617
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 618
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 618
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ......... 620
Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 621
Capacities and Specifications .................... 626
493
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer for all your service needs. You will
get genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle
they can affect your vehicle’s performance and
safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems
like anti-lock brakes, traction control and
stability control. Some of these accessories could
even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle
all GM. Genuine GM parts have one of these
marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize your
vehicle using genuine GM Accessories. When you
go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM
Accessories, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
494
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and
metric fasteners can be easily
confused. If you use the wrong
fasteners, parts can later break or fall
off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you should use the proper service manual. It
tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper
service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 669.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 110.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 648.
495
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may
cause wind noise and affect windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Diesel
Fuel Requirements and Fuel System” in the
DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement.
For vehicles with gasoline engines, please
read this.
496
Gasoline
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum
vehicle performance, GM recommends the use
of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) shows the code letter or number that
identifies your vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the
top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on page 616.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code
0) or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), you
can use either regular unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85);
also see Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 499.
In all other gasoline engines, use only regular
unleaded gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, you might notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine
needs service.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is
not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 266. If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the type
of fuel used, repairs may not be covered by
your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT). General Motors recommends against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 498 for additional information.
497
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that will help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing your emission
control system to work properly. In most cases,
you should not have to add anything to your fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer has additives that will help correct
and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers
and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may
be available in your area. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines if they
comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels
containing more than 10% ethanol must not be
used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
498
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
not be covered under your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
General Motors recommends against the use of
such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system may be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If this
occurs, return to your dealer for service.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) shows the code letter or number that
identifies your vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the
top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) on page 616.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0)
or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), you can use
either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see Fuel
on page 496. In all other engines, use only the
unleaded gasoline described under Gasoline
Octane on page 497.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN
Code 0) or the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3) can
use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use
of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The
ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is
made from renewable sources such as corn and
other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department of
Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/
locator.html) that can help you find E85 fuel. Those
stations that do have E85 should have a label
indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if the
ethanol content is greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM
Specification D 5798. By definition, this means
that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content
between 70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank
with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM
specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85
fuel must be formulated properly for your climate
according to ASTM specification D 5798. If you
have trouble starting on E85, it could be because
the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your
climate. If this happens, switching to gasoline or
adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve
starting. For good starting and heater efficiency
below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best
not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and
E85. If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that
you add as much fuel as possible — do not add
less than three gallons (11 L) when refueling. You
should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle
to adapt to the change in ethanol concentration.
499
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so
you will need to refill the fuel tank more often
when using E85 than when you are using gasoline.
See Filling the Tank on page 500.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible
with E85 fuel and can harm your vehicle’s fuel
system. Do not add anything to E85. Damage
caused by additives would not be covered
by your new vehicle warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
not be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
500
Filling the Tank
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,
see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the
law in some places. Do not re-enter the
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children
away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and
then something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If
the vehicle has E85 fuel capability, a yellow cap
with the words “E85 / Gasoline” can be seen.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise.
If your vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cab
model, and it runs out of fuel, refuel the front fuel
tank first to ensure a quick restart.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon
as possible. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 611.
501
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the
fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Make
sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left
off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 266.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) if
the fuel cap is not properly installed. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 285 for more
information.
502
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer/retailer can
get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it
may not fit properly. This may cause your
malfunction indicator lamp to light and may
damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 266.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite
the gasoline vapor. You can be badly
burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and
others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside
a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
CAUTION:
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping
gasoline.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping gasoline.
(Continued)
503
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan can start
even when the engine is not running.
To avoid injury, always keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any engine
cooling fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
504
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It
is located inside
the vehicle to the left
of the brake
pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate
the secondary hood release. This is located
under the hood, near the center of the grille.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler
caps are on properly. Then bring the hood from
full open to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the
closed position, pause, then push the front
center of the hood with a swift, firm motion to
fully close the hood.
505
Engine Compartment Overview
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L and 6.0L similar), this is what you will see:
506
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 513.
B. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline
Engines) on page 513.
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Cooling System on page 527 and Coolant
Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 523.
D. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 540.
E. Battery. See Battery on page 539.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
Oil” under Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on
page 508.
G. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 516.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View).
See Jump Starting on page 540.
I. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See
“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil
(Gasoline Engine) on page 508.
J. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 527.
K. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 532.
L. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 535.
M. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse
Block on page 621.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 533.
507
Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
Checking Engine Oil
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Engine
Oil” in the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light appears on the
instrument cluster, except vehicles that have the
4.3L engine, check the engine oil level right away.
For more information, see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 273. You should check the
engine oil level regularly; this is an added
reminder.
508
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 506
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several
minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you
do not do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip
of the dipstick, you need to add at least one
quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.
This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
and Specifications on page 626.
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 506 for the
location of the engine oil
fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range. Push
the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the
proper operating range, the engine could be
damaged.
509
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
510
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This
symbol indicates that
the oil has been
certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure
to use the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide
easier cold starting and better protection for
the engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will come on. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 285. Change the oil as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system might
not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service people who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system. It
is also important to check the oil regularly and
keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
511
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the
system so it can calculate when the next oil
change is required. If a situation occurs where you
change the oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message coming on, reset the system.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every
oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the
Engine Oil Life System:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
DIC. If your vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, the vehicle must be in PARK (P) to
access this display. See DIC Operation
and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 274
or DIC Operation and Displays (Without
DIC Buttons) on page 281.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the
DIC, or the trip odometer reset stem if your
vehicle does not have DIC buttons, for
more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
512
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes back on when you start your vehicle, the
Engine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeat
the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can
be unhealthy for your skin and could even
cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your
skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with
soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash
or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing
used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the
ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place
that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local
recycling center for help.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline
Engines)
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Pickup
Models” under “Engine Air Cleaner/Filter” in
the DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement for the correct
inspection and replacement procedures.
If your vehicle has an air filter restriction indicator,
it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/filter
needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction
indicator, you should inspect the air filter
restriction indicator at every oil change and
replace the engine air cleaner/filter when the
indicator tells you to.
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 506 for the
location of the engine air
cleaner/filter and the
air filter restriction
indicator, if the vehicle
has one.
On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change
after each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on
page 633 for more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
513
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the
engine air cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator
turns black or is in the red/orange “change”
zone, replace the filter and reset the indicator. See
Steps 1 through 7 to replace the engine air
cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter restriction
indicator.
Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine
air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following
Steps 1 through 7. When you have the engine air
cleaner/filter removed, lightly shake it to release
loose dust and dirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter is required.
514
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 506.
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the
housing and lift up the cover.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing
surfaces and the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if
the vehicle has one, by pressing the top button
on the indicator.
515
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is usually not necessary to check the
transmission fluid level. The only reason for fluid
loss is a transmission leak or overheating the
transmission. If you suspect a small leak, then use
the following checking procedures to check the
fluid level. However, if there is a large leak, then it
may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to
a dealer/retailer service department and have
it repaired before driving the vehicle further.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the automatic
transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 644.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
the Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 633. Be
sure to use the transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 644.
516
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage your transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could come out
and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system
parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Before checking the fluid level, prepare your
vehicle as follows:
1. Start the engine and park your vehicle on a
level surface. Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear range, pausing
for about three seconds in each range.
Then, move the shift lever back to PARK (P).
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at
least one minute. Slowly release the brake
pedal.
5. Keep the engine running and press the
Trip/Fuel button or trip odometer reset
stem until TRANS TEMP (Transmission
Temperature) displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine
and perform the appropriate check procedure.
If the TRANS TEMP reading is not within
the required temperature ranges, allow
the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until
the appropriate transmission fluid temperature
is reached.
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a reference to
determine if the transmission has enough fluid to
be operated safely until a hot check procedure
can be made. The hot check procedure is the most
accurate method to check the fluid level. Perform
the hot check procedure at the first opportunity.
Use this cold check procedure to check fluid level
when the transmission temperature is between
80°F and 90°F (27°C and 32°C).
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of
the engine compartment, on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
The dipstick handle has
this graphic. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 506 for
more information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the
dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
517
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the
way, wait three seconds, and then pull it back
out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. Repeat the check procedure to
verify the reading.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity
after the transmission reaches a normal
operating temperature between 160°F to
200°F (71°C to 93°C).
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way, then
flip the handle down to lock the dipstick
in place.
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid
level when the transmission fluid temperature is
between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check
band, add only enough fluid as necessary
to bring the level into the COLD band. It does
not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.
518
The hot check is the most accurate method to
check the fluid level. The hot check should
be performed at the first opportunity in order to
verify the cold check. The fluid level rises as fluid
temperature increases, so it is important to
ensure the transmission temperature is within
range.
1. Locate the transmission dipstick at the rear of
the engine compartment, on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
The dipstick handle has
this graphic. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 506 for
more information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the
dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the
way, wait three seconds, and then pull it back
out again.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. Repeat the check procedure to
verify the reading.
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT
crosshatch band on the dipstick. If the fluid
level is not within the HOT band, and the
transmission temperature is between 160°F
and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add or drain fluid
as necessary to bring the level into the HOT
band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough
fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It
does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
push the dipstick back in all the way, then
flip the handle down to lock the dipstick
in place.
519
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using
the procedures described. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid
level. If fluid is added, it may take 15 minutes
or longer to obtain an accurate reading because of
residual fluid draining down the dipstick tube. If
inconsistent readings persist, check the
transmission breather to be sure it is clean and
not clogged. If readings are still inconsistent,
contact your dealer/retailer.
Engine Coolant
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,
see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
520
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 523.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to
−34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a
year, have your dealer/retailer check your
cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 644 for more information.
521
Checking Coolant
Adding Coolant
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 506 for more information on location.
If you need more coolant, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,
but only when the engine is cool. See Cooling
System on page 527 for more information.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when
the engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. Never turn the surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — when
the engine and radiator are hot.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark on the coolant surge tank.
If your vehicle has a low coolant sensor and the
LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes on
and stays on, it means you are low on engine
coolant. See “LOW COOLANT LEVEL” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 285.
522
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Engine Overheating
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,
see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 506 for more
information on location.
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 264.
In addition, you will find ENGINE OVERHEATED
STOP ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE, and ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
messages in the Driver Information Center (DIC)
on the instrument panel. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 285.
523
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it
off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant
before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when the vehicles
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
CAUTION:
524
(Continued)
(Continued)
See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode (V8 Engines Only) on
page 526 for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode
(V8 Engines Only) on page 526 for information
on driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or
the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
message, along with a low coolant condition, can
indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on
page 449.
If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE message with no sign of steam, try this
for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn
it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
3. If you are stopped in a traffic jam, apply the
brake, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to
the highest gear while driving — DRIVE (D) or
THIRD (3).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
525
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle immediately.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle
has an engine-driven cooling fan, push down
the accelerator until the engine speed is about
twice as fast as normal idle speed for at least
five minutes while you are parked.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle
has an electric cooling fan, idle the engine for
five minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine
and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
526
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode (V8 Engines Only)
If an overheated engine condition exists and
the REDUCED ENGINE POWER message
is displayed, an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this mode, you will
notice a loss in power and engine performance.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in
the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated
engine protection operating mode, to avoid
engine damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
loss, change the oil and reset the oil life
system. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on
page 508.
Cooling System
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine,
see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan can start
even when the engine is not running.
To avoid injury, always keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any engine
cooling fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
Check the coolant level after the system cools
down. Some amount of coolant may be lost due to
overheating.
5.3L Engine (4.3L, 4.8L and 6.0L Similar)
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
527
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If
you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
528
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode (V8 Engines Only) on page 526
for information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank for Gasoline Engines
If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Cooling
System” in the DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement for
the proper coolant fill procedure.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant
is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the
FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure
cap, is cool before you do it. See Engine
Coolant on page 520 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the coolant surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
529
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and a proper coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
530
1. Remove the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank
pressure cap and
upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop. A hiss means there is
still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,
start the engine and let it run until the engine
coolant temperature gage indicates
approximately 195°F (90°C).
By this time, the coolant level inside the
coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level
is lower, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level
reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off
and the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat
coolant fill procedure Steps 1 through 6.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FULL COLD mark.
531
Engine Fan Noise
If your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan,
when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins
faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In
most everyday driving conditions, the fan is
spinning slower and the clutch is not fully engaged.
This improves fuel economy and reduces fan
noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,
and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages, so you
may hear an increase in fan noise. This is
normal and should not be mistaken as the
transmission slipping or making extra shifts. It is
merely the cooling system functioning properly.
The fan will slow down when additional cooling is
not required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
partially disengages.
532
If your vehicle has electric cooling fans, you may
hear the fans spinning at low speed during
most everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no
cooling is required. Under heavy vehicle loading,
trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, or
if you are operating your air conditioning system,
the fans may change to high speed and you
may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal
and indicates that the cooling system is
functioning properly. The fans will change to low
speed when additional cooling is no longer
required.
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 506 for
reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in
the system or you hear an unusual noise. A
fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 644.
Always use the proper fluid.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir
clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage
your vehicle and the damages may not be
covered by your warranty. Always use
the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 644.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added,
be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions
before use. Use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the mark.
533
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message in
the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid
is low. The message is displayed for 15 seconds
at the start of each ignition cycle. When the
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message
displays, you will need to add washer fluid to the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Engine Compartment
Overview on page 506
for reservoir location.
534
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
the vehicle’s windshield washer system
and paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 506 for the
location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system. If it is, you should have the
brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later the brakes will not work well.
So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
fluid when the linings are worn, there will be too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. Add or
remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if
the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic
system. See “Checking Brake Fluid” in
this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 633.
535
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
The brake fluid can be checked without taking off
the cap by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 644.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake
system checked to see
if there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not
over the MAX mark.
536
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well.
This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 611.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and could have
rear drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause
a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and Specifications on
page 626.
537
If you have rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake
rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings
inspected immediately. Rear brake drums should
be removed and inspected each time the tires
are removed for rotation or changing. Drum brakes
have an inspection hole to inspect lining wear
during scheduled maintenance. When you have
the front brake pads replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does
not return to normal height, or if there is a
rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, the brakes
adjust for wear.
538
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested
with top-quality brake parts. When you replace
parts of the braking system — for example, when
the brake linings wear down and you need
new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes
might not work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between the front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Vehicle Storage
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery (or
batteries). When it is time for a new battery,
see your dealer/retailer for one that has the
replacement number shown on the original
battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 506 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep the
battery from running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
Starting on page 540 for tips on working
around a battery without getting hurt.
539
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run
down, you may want to use another vehicle and
some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure
to use the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
540
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. If you have a vehicle with a diesel engine with
two batteries, you should know before you
begin that, especially in cold weather, you may
not be able to get enough power from a
single battery in another vehicle to start your
diesel engine. If your vehicle has more
than one battery, use the battery that is closer
to the starter -- this will reduce electrical
resistance. This is located on the passenger
side, in the rear of the engine compartment.
3. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause an unwanted ground connection.
You would not be able to start your vehicle,
and the bad grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
the automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear, not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlets. Turn off the radio and all the lamps
that are not needed. This will avoid sparks and
help save both batteries. And it could save
the radio!
5. Open the hood on the other vehicle and
locate the positive (+) and negative (−)
terminal locations on that vehicle.
The positive (+) terminal, is located under a
red plastic cover at the positive battery
post. To uncover the positive (+) terminal,
open the red plastic cover.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
541
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
The remote negative (−) terminal is a stud located
on the right front passenger side of the engine,
where the negative battery cable attaches.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 506
542
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
Be sure the battery has enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
battery installed in your new vehicle. But
if a battery has filler caps, be sure the
right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you
do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
6. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or
you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
543
7. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to
the positive (+)
terminal of
the vehicle with the
dead battery.
5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L
and 6.0L similar)
8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step.
544
10. Connect the other end of the negative (−)
cable to a heavy, unpainted metal engine
part or to the remote negative (−) terminal, on
the vehicle with the dead battery.
11. Start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical
shorting may occur and damage the vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always connect and remove
the jumper cables in the correct order, making
sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover, to its
original position.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
545
Rear Axle
How to Check Lubricant
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid
during production. They are not filled to reach
a certain level. When checking the fluid level on
any axle, variations in the readings can be caused
by factory fill differences between the minimum
and the maximum fluid volume. Also, if a vehicle
has just been driven before checking the fluid
level, it may appear lower than normal because
fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has
not drained back to the sump area. Therefore, a
reading taken five minutes after the vehicle
has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid
level than a vehicle that has been stationary
for an hour or two. Remember that the rear axle
assembly must be supported to get a true reading.
546
2500HD with 6.0L
• For all 6.0L 1500 Series applications, the
All Other Series and Engines
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
• For all 4.3L, 4.8L and 5.3L 1500 Series
applications, the proper level is 0.04 inches to
0.75 inches (1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the
bottom of the filler hole, located on the
rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the
proper level.
proper level is from 0.6 inches to 1.6 inches
(15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only
enough fluid to reach the proper level.
• For all 6.0L 2500HD Series applications, the
proper level is from 0 to 0.5 inches (0 mm to
13 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid
to reach the proper level.
• For all 6.6L DURAMAX® Diesel 2500HD Series
applications and all 3500 Series applications,
the proper level is from 0.6 inches to 0.8 inches
(17 mm to 21 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only
enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 644.
547
Four-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to
these vehicles.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak, or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate
a problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
Electric Shift Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
548
Manual Shift Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
Active Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the transfer case, you will need to
add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
549
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to change the lubricant. See
Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on
page 633.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 644.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a
problem. Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
550
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, located on the front axle, you may need
to add some lubricant:
• When the differential is cold, add enough
lubricant to raise the level from 0 (0 mm)
to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating
temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to
raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 644.
Noise Control System
Tampering with Noise Control
System Prohibited
The following information relates to compliance
with federal noise emission standards for vehicles
with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of
more than 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance
Schedule provides information on maintaining
the noise control system to minimize degradation
of the noise emission control system during
the life of your vehicle. The noise control system
warranty is given in your warranty booklet.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof:
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of
maintenance, repair or replacement, of any
device or element of design incorporated into
any new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control, prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or
element of design has been removed or
rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute
tampering are the acts listed below.
Insulation:
• Removal of the noise shields or any
underhood insulation.
Engine:
• Removal or rendering engine speed governor,
if the vehicle has one, inoperative so as to
allow engine speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
551
Fan and Drive:
• Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one,
or rendering clutch inoperative.
• Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has
one.
Air Intake:
• Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
• Modification of the air cleaner.
Exhaust:
• Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
• Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust
pipe clamps.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 557.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on
page 504 for more information.
2. If you are replacing the bulb on the passenger
side remove the Engine Air Cleaner cover.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline
Engines) on page 513 for more information.
3. Reach in and access the bulb sockets from
inside the engine compartment.
552
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it from the headlamp assembly
and pull it straight out.
5. Unplug the electrical connector from the old
bulb by releasing the clips on the bulb socket.
6. Replace it with a new bulb socket.
7. Plug in the electrical connector to the new
bulb socket.
8. Reinstall the new bulb socket into the
headlamp assembly and turn it clockwise to
secure.
9. Close the hood.
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp
assembly.
553
Pickup Box Identification and
Fender Marker Lamps
To replace a pickup box identification or fender
marker lamp bulb:
1. Press the tab from the back to remove
the lamp.
A. Cargo Lamp
B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb
(CHMSL)
2. Remove the CHMSL and Cargo bulbs by
turning socket counterclockwise and pulling
the bulb straight out.
3. Install the CHMSL and Cargo bulbs by
pushing the bulb straight in and turning
clockwise.
4. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
554
2. Unplug the lamp assembly harness.
3. Gently pry the individual lamp from the lamp
assembly.
4. Unplug the lamp.
5. Plug in a new lamp and snap it into the
assembly.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the tailgate. Tailgate on page 129 for
more information.
2. Remove the two
rear lamp assembly
screws near the
tailgate latch
strikerpost and pull
out the lamp
assembly.
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it from the taillamp assembly.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn
the socket clockwise into the taillamp
assembly.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
A. Stoplamp/Turn
Signal/Taillamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Turn
Signal/Taillamp
3. Determine which of the following taillamp
assembly applies to your vehicle.
555
Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models)
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb
socket.
A. Backup Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the four screws.
2. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly.
3. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and pull
the old bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Install a new bulb into the socket, turn it
clockwise, and press it in until it is tight.
5. Reinstall the lens and the four screws.
556
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
pull the bulb socket out of the connector.
3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keeping
the bulb straight as you pull it out.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
bulb socket.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Back-up Lamp*
Cargo Lamp and Center
High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Fender Marker Lamp
License Plate Lamp
Sidemarker Lamp/Stoplamp/
Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp*
Sidemarker Lamp/Stoplamp/
Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
Stoplamp/Turn Signal
Lamp/Taillamp*
* Chassis Cab Models
Bulb Number
3047
1156
912
4114K
W5WLL
168
3047
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine) on page 633.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To replace the
wiper blade assembly, do the following:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away
from the windshield.
3047
1157
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer/retailer.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of
the blade, and rotate the blade assembly
away from the arm connector.
557
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet for
details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector
and make sure the grooved areas are fully set
in the locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 646.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.
CAUTION:
558
(Continued)
20-Inch Tires
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 567.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch
P275/55R20 size tires, they are classified as
touring tires and are designed for on road use. The
low-profile, wide tread design is not recommended
for “off-road” driving or commercial uses such
as snow plowing. See Off-Road Driving on
page 394 and Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment on page 435 for additional information.
559
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
560
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on
page 581.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 567 and
Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
561
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 567 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
562
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 567 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire
size means a light truck tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
563
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
564
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 567.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
rear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 428.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
565
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 567 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 428.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 577.
566
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 581.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 428.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Your Vehicle on page 428.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading Your Vehicle on page 428. How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
tire, if your vehicle has one. See Spare Tire
on page 606 for additional information.
567
How to Check
Dual Tire Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when
they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel,
wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check
the wheel nut torque after 100, 1,000 and
6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving.
For proper torque and wheel nut tightening
information, see Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools on page 588.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading information label,
no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
568
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally
wears faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear
more evenly and last longer if you rotate the
tires periodically, see Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 574. Also see Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine) on page 633.
{CAUTION:
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that
is badly underinflated, the tire can
overheat. An overheated tire can lose air
suddenly or catch fire. You or others
could be injured. Be sure all tires
(including the spare) are properly inflated.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 567, for
information on proper tire inflation.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure
levels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensors
are mounted on each tire and wheel assembly,
except the spare tire. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a low
tire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has the
Driver Information Center (DIC), the driver may also
check tire pressure levels using the DIC.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected,
the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure
warning symbol located on the instrument panel
cluster. If your vehicle has the DIC feature, a
message to check the pressure in a specific tire
will also appear on the DIC display. The low
tire pressure warning symbol on the instrument
panel cluster and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning message on the DIC display will appear at
each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to
the correct inflation pressure. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation
and displays see DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons) on page 274 or DIC Operation
and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 281
and DIC Warnings and Messages on page 285.
569
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,
that the tire pressure monitor light, located on
the instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE message will appear when the
vehicle is first started and then turn off as you
start to drive the vehicle. This could be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with
a tire pressure
monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure
telltale when one
or more of your tires is
significantly
under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
570
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message
and low tire pressure light (telltale) will come
on each time the vehicle is started until the tires
are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
The Tire and Loading Information label (tire
information placard) shows the size of your
vehicle’s original tires and the correct inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they
are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 567. For the location of the tire and loading
information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 428.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace
normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 574 and Tires on page 558.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your
vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors.
571
Resetting the TPMS Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or
replace one or more of the TPMS sensors,
the identification codes will need to be matched to
the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following
order: driver’s side front tire, passengers side
front tire, passengers side rear tire, and driver’s
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.
See your GM dealer for service.
The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s
air pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.
You will have two minutes to match the first
tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to
match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer
than two minutes, to match the first tire and
wheel, or more than five minutes to match all four
tire and wheel positions the matching process
stops and you will need to start over.
572
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined
below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the
engine off.
3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle information
button until the RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS
message displays. If your vehicle does not
have the DIC buttons, press the trip odometer
reset stem located on the instrument panel
cluster until the RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS
message displays.
4. If your vehicle has the DIC buttons, press the
set/reset button. The horn will sound twice to
indicate the TPMS receiver is ready, and
the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message will
display. If your vehicle does not have the DIC
buttons, press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem until the horn chirps twice and the
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message is
displayed.
5. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by
increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure
for five seconds, or until a horn chirp
sounds. The horn chirp, which make take up
to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that the
sensor identification code has been matched
to this tire and wheel position. To decrease
air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gage, or a key.
9. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
10. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
driver’s side rear tire, the horn chirp will sound
two more times to signal the tire learning
mode is no longer active. Turn the ignition
switch to LOCK.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
8. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 6.
The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,
the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message will be
displayed on the DIC screen. This message should
go off once you re-install the road tire containing
the TPMS sensor.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
573
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
Tire Inspection and Rotation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 577
and Wheel Replacement on page 582 for
more information.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies with
RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
574
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Make sure the spare tire, if your vehicle has one,
is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to
rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the wheel
wrench/hoist shaft to tighten the cable. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 586.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see Dual
Tire Operation on page 568.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
Maintenance (Gasoline Engine) on page 633.
If your vehicle has single rear wheels and the
tread design for your front tires is the same as your
rear tires, use the rotation pattern shown here
when rotating your tires.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread
design for your front tires is the same as your
rear tires, always use one of the correct rotation
patterns shown here when rotating your tires.
575
If your vehicle has dual
rear wheels and the
tread design for the front
tires is different from
the dual rear tires,
always use the correct
rotation pattern
shown here when
rotating your tires.
The dual tires are rotated as a pair, and the inside
rear tires become the outside rear tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent
holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side
are lined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 428.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 626.
576
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 586.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
577
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were
designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM
strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 560 for additional information.
578
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle might
not handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types could also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size, brand, and type tires on all wheels.
Your vehicle may have a different size
spare than the road tires (those originally
installed on your vehicle). When new, your
vehicle included a spare tire and wheel
assembly with a similar overall diameter
as your vehicle’s road tires and wheels,
so it is all right to drive on it. Because
this spare was developed for use on your
vehicle, it will not affect vehicle handling.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring
system may give an inaccurate low-pressure
warning if non-TPC spec rated tires are installed
on your vehicle. Non-TPC Spec rated tires
may give a low-pressure warning that is higher or
lower than the proper warning level you would
get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 569.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed
on the Tire and Loading Information Label.
This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428,
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information Label and its location on your vehicle.
579
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this could affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags,
traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 578 and
Accessories and Modifications on page 494 for
additional information.
580
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
581
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you
the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire
balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.
However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your
vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice
your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
582
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace
it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of
these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it
replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new GM original equipment parts. This way, you
will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is
replaced on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel
nut torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) of driving. For proper
torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities
and Specifications on page 626.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 586 for more
information.
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
583
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven. It
could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has dual wheels or
P265/65R18, P275/55R20 or LT265/70R17
size tires, do not use tire chains. They can
CAUTION:
584
(Continued)
(Continued)
damage your vehicle because there is not
enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use
on your vehicle and tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid
damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust, or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin
your vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle does not have dual
wheels and has a tire size other than
P265/65R18, P275/55R20 or LT265/70R17, use
tire chains only where legal and only when
you must. Use chains that are the proper size
for your tires. Install them on the tires of
the rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires of
the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains
contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your
vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering
wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,
and then gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
585
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
586
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 217 for more
information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over
or fall on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or even killed.
Find a level place to change your tire. To
help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear – not in NEUTRAL.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will
not move, put blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
The following information will tell you next how to
use the jack and change a tire.
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of the wheel blocks.
587
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Regular Cab
Crew Cab
A. Wing Nut
Retaining Tool Kit
B. Tool Kit
C. Wheel Blocks
588
D. Jack
E. Wing Nut
Retaining Wheel
Blocks
A. Tool Cover
B. Wing Nut
Retaining Wheel
Blocks
C.
D.
E.
F.
Wheel Blocks
Tool Kit
Jack
Knob
For regular cab models, the equipment you will
need is behind the passenger’s seat. For extended
and crew cab models, the equipment is on the
shelf behind the passenger’s side second
row seat.
1. If there is a cover, move the seats forward
and turn the wing nut on the cover
counterclockwise to remove it. For crew cab
models, pull up the second row seat with
the loop at the base of the seat cushion to
access the tools.
Extended Cab
A. Wing Nut
Retaining
Tool Kit
B. Tool Kit
C. Wheel Blocks
D. Jack
E. Knob
2. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to
lower the jack head to release the jack from
its holder.
3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel
block retainer by turning the wing nut
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the wing nut used to retain the
storage bag and tools by turning it
counterclockwise.
You will use the jack handle extensions and the
wheel wrench to remove the underbody-mounted
spare tire.
589
1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper
and use the ignition key to remove the spare
tire lock (J). To remove the spare tire lock,
insert the ignition key turn and pull straight out.
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire/Wheel
Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
590
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Spare Tire Lock
(If equipped)
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the
two jack handle extensions (I) as shown.
3. Insert the hoist end
(open end) (F) of the
extension through
the hole (G) in
the rear bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension (F)
connects to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed
square end of the extension is used to lower
the spare tire.
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise
to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue
to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire
can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,
the secondary latch is engaged causing
the tire not to lower. See Secondary Latch
System on page 598.
5. Use the wheel
wrench hook which
allows you to
pull the hoist cable
towards you to
assist in reaching
the spare tire.
6. Tilt the retainer (D)
at the end of the
cable (C) when the
tire has been
lowered, so it can
be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
591
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to
remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
2. If your vehicle has
wheel nut caps,
loosen them
by turning the wheel
wrench
counterclockwise.
If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nut
caps, the wheel nut caps are designed to
stay with the center cap after they are
loosened. Remove the entire center cap.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
the wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack
handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 586 for more
information.
592
If the wheel has a smooth center cap, place
the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the
slot on the wheel, and gently pry it out.
3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it
counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do
not remove the wheel nuts yet.
593
Front Position - 1500 Models
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle
(1500 Model vehicles), position the jack under
the bracket attached to the vehicle’s frame,
behind the flat tire. If the flat tire is on the front
of the vehicle (all other models), position
the jack on the frame behind the flat tire.
594
Front Position - All Other Models
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is
supported only by a jack.
{CAUTION:
Rear Position – All Models
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack
under the rear axle between the spring anchor
and the shock absorber bracket.
If you have added a snow plow to the front of
your vehicle, lower the snow plow fully
before raising the vehicle.
Make sure that the jack head is positioned so
that the rear axle is resting securely between
the grooves that are on the jack head.
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To
help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
595
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit under the wheel well.
6. Remove all the
wheel nuts and take
off the flat tire.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from the places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can
be used to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
7. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare
wheel.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time. The
CAUTION:
596
(Continued)
8. Install the spare tire.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 626
for wheel nut torque specification.
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded
end of the nuts toward the wheel.
10. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use
the wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the
wheel is held against the hub.
11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
597
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 626 for
the wheel nut torque specification.
way. Be sure to line up the tab on the center cap
with the indentation on the wheel. For bolt-on
hub caps, align the plastic nut caps with the wheel
nuts and then tighten by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten.
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly which has a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly
falling off your vehicle. For the secondary latch
to work, the spare tire must be installed with
the valve stem pointing down. See Storing a Flat
or Spare Tire and Tools on page 602.
{CAUTION:
12. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown by turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you
must also reinstall either the center cap, or
bolt-on hub cap, depending on what your vehicle
is equipped with. For center caps, place the
cap on the wheel and tap it into place until it seats
flush with the wheel. The cap only goes on one
598
Before beginning this procedure read all
the instructions. Failure to read and follow
the instructions could damage the hoist
assembly and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the instructions
listed next.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is
visible. If the cable
is not visible,
proceed to Step 6.
5. If the spare tire does not lower, turn the wheel
wrench counterclockwise until approximately
6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends,
with the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom
edge of the jack (A)
on the wheel
blocks (B),
separating them so
that the jack is
balanced securely.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you
hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You
cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If
the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue
with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire
and Tools on page 588.
599
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the
wheel blocks) under the vehicle toward the
front of the rear bumper.
600
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under
the center of the spare tire.
10. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
jack until it lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in
place so that the secondary latch has released
and the spare tire is balancing on the jack.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack
until the spare tire slides off the jack or
is hanging by the cable.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If
the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind
you or on either side of you as you pull
the jack out from under the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack with the other hand.
14. Use one hand to push against the spare while
firmly pulling the jack out from under the
spare tire with the other hand. If the spare tire
is hanging from the cable, insert the hoist
end of the extension, and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and
turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire the rest of the way.
15. Tilt the tire retainer
at the end of the
cable and pull
it through the wheel
opening. Pull the
tire out from
under the vehicle.
16. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole
in the bumper clockwise to raise the cable
back up if the cable is hanging under
the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as
you can. You will not be able to store a spare or
flat tire using the hoist assembly until it has
been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing
the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on
page 592.
601
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
Use the following art and text to assist you:
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat
tire under your vehicle for an extended
period of time or with the valve stem pointing
up can damage the wheel. Always stow the
wheel with the valve stem pointing down and
have the wheel/tire repaired as soon as
possible.
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the
spare tire carrier.
602
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire/Wheel
Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extensions
J. Spare Tire Lock
(If Equipped)
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down,
and to the rear.
2. Tilt the retainer
downward and
through the wheel
opening. Make
sure the retainer is
fully seated
across the underside
of the wheel.
4. Insert the hoist
end (F) through the
hole (G) in the
rear bumper and
onto the hoist
shaft (E).
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer (D) is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of
the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it
skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and
extensions (I) together.
603
To store the jack and jack tools, do the following:
Crew Cab
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the
tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten
the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, if the vehicle
has one.
604
A. Wing Nut
Retaining
Tool Kit
B. Tool Kit
C. Wheel Blocks
D. Jack
E. Wing Nut
Retaining Wheel
Blocks
Regular Cab
A. Tool Cover
B. Wing Nut
Retaining
Wheel Blocks
C. Wheel Blocks
D. Tool Kit
E. Jack
F. Wing Nut
Retaining Jack
Extended Cab
A. Wing Nut
Retaining
Tool Kit
B. Tool Kit
C. Wheel Blocks
D. Jack
E. Wing Nut
Retaining Jack
1. Put the tools in the tool bag and place them in
the retaining bracket.
If your vehicle has a cover replace the cover.
2. Tighten down the wing nut.
605
3. Assemble the wheel blocks and jack together
with the wing nut and retaining hook.
If you have the Regular Cab, the wheel blocks
must be placed straight up and down on the
top of the jack.
4. Position the jack in the mounting bracket.
Position the holes in the base of the jack
onto the pin in the mounting bracket.
5. Return them to their original location in the
vehicle. For more information, refer to
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on
page 588 for more information.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare
tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 567 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 428 for information regarding proper tire
inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction on
how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire
on page 592 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools on page 602.
606
Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive
and the different size spare tire is installed on
your vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel
drive until you can have your flat tire repaired
and/or replaced. You could damage your
vehicle, and the repair costs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never use
four-wheel drive when the different size spare
tire is installed on your vehicle.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire
than the road tires originally installed on your
vehicle. This spare tire was developed for use on
your vehicle, so it is all right to drive on it. If
your vehicle has four-wheel drive and the different
size spare tire is installed, keep the vehicle in
two-wheel drive.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make
sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. Have the
damaged or flat road tire repaired or replaced
as soon as you can and installed back onto your
vehicle. This way, the spare tire will be available
in case you need it again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,
because they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and
its wheel together. If your vehicle has a spare
tire that does not match your vehicle’s original road
tires and wheels in size and type, do not include
the spare in the tire rotation.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more
frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers
and garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation by
opening your vehicle’s doors and windows.
607
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,
you can also obtain a product from your GM dealer
to remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid
laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave
a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
608
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such
as naptha, alcohol, etc.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush
attachment frequently to remove dust and loose
dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in
the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and
carpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil
as possible using one of the following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil
with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into
the paper towel until no more can be
removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as
possible and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on leather.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
609
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
610
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 644.
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
Your Vehicle on page 611.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use
strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to
rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap
residue completely. Approved cleaning products
can be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 615. Do not
use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry
the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an
all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish. You can get approved
cleaning products from your dealer. See Vehicle
Care/Appearance Materials on page 615.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and
polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
611
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial
chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if
they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle
as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces
to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll
over a period of years. You can help to keep
the paint finish looking new by keeping your
vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to
keep their luster. Washing with water is all
that is usually needed. However, you may use
chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if
necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or
chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean
aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,
is recommended for all bright metal parts.
612
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass
cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime,
sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments
may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper
blades if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim
may be damaged if you do not wash your
vehicle after driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium
chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust. Always
wash your vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
buff off immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
613
Tires
Finish Damage
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair
shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in
your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close
areas of the frame should be loosened before being
flushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
614
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles
(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
615
Description
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Odor Eliminator
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step. No
wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code helps you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
616
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not
be covered by your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 110.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an
internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor
overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will
stop until the motor cools. If the overload is
caused by some electrical problem and not snow,
etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and
other power accessories. If the current load is too
heavy, the circuit breaker opens and then
closes after a cool down period, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
617
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.
This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel
fuse block access door
is located on the
driver’s side edge of the
instrument panel.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If
the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of
the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can get along without, like the radio
or cigarette lighter, and use its fuse if it is the
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
618
Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
Fuses
PDM
UNLCK2
LCK2
STOP LAMPS
Fuses
REAR SEAT
AUX PWR2
SWC BKLT
DDM
CTSY
LT STOP TRN
DIM
RT STOP TRN
Usage
Rear Seats
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
Driver Door Module
Dome Lamps, Driver’s Side Turn
Signal
Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Instrument Panel Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn Signal,
Stoplamp
REAR HVAC
PWR MIR
BCM
AUX PWR
IS LAMPS
UNLCK1
OBS DET
LCK1
REAR WPR
COOLED
SEATS
DSM
DRV UNLCK
Usage
Passenger Door Module, Universal
Home Remote System
Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
Stoplamp
Rear Climate Controls
Power Mirror
Body Control Module (BCM)
Accessory Power Outlets
Interior Lamps
Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
Not Used
Not Used
Driver Seat Module, Remote
Keyless Entry System
Driver’s Power Door Lock
(Unlock Feature)
619
Circuit Breaker
LT DR
Harness
Connector
LT DR
BODY
BODY
Usage
Driver’s Side Power Window Circuit
Breaker
Top View
Usage
Driver’s Door Harness Connection
Harness Connector
Harness Connector
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The center instrument panel fuse block is
located underneath the instrument panel, to the
left of the steering column.
Harness
Connector
BODY 2
BODY 1
BODY 3
HEADLINER 3
HEADLINER 2
HEADLINER 1
620
Usage
Body Harness Connector 2
Body Harness Connector 1
Body Harness Connector 3
Headliner Harness Connector 3
Headliner Harness Connector 2
Headliner Harness Connector 1
Harness
Connector
BRAKE
CLUTCH
Usage
Brake Clutch Harness Connector
Equipment Option Upfitter
SEO/UPFITTER Special
Harness Connector
Circuit Breaker
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
Lift the cover to access
the fuse block.
Usage
Passenger’s Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
Passenger’s Seat Circuit Breaker
Driver’s Seat Circuit Breaker
Not Used
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse
between your thumb and index finger and pull
straight out.
621
Fuses
1
2
3
622
Usage
Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Not Used
Electronic Stability Suspension
Control, Automatic Level Control
Exhaust
Fuses
4
5
6
7
Usage
Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Engine Controls
Engine Control Module, Throttle
Control
Trailer Brake Controller
Fuses
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Usage
Front Washer
Oxygen Sensors
Anti-lock Brakes System 2
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Engine Control Module (Battery)
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Right
Side)
Transmission Control Module
(Battery)
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Passenger’s Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
Air Conditioning Compressor
Oxygen Sensors
Transmission Controls (Ignition)
Fuses
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Usage
Fuel Pump
Fuel System Control Module
Not Used
Not Used
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Left
Side)
Trailer Park Lamps
Driver’s Side Park Lamps
Passenger’s Side Park Lamps
Fog Lamps
Horn
Passenger’s Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps
Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp
Not Used
623
Fuses
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
624
Usage
Sunroof
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent
System
Windshield Wiper
SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Climate Controls (Battery)
Airbag System (Ignition)
Amplifier
Audio System
Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise
Control
Tailgate Open/Close Assist
Airbag System (Battery)
OnStar®, Rear Seat Entertainment
Display
Fuses
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
Usage
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Take-Off
Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition),
Compass-Temperature Mirror
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
Rear Defogger
Heated Mirrors
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Relay, SEO Upfitter Usage
Climate Controls (Ignition)
Engine Control Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
J-Case Fuses
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Heavy Duty Anti-lock Brake System
Cooling Fan 2
Anti-lock Brake System 1
Starter
Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Left Bussed Electrical Center 1
Not Used
Heated Windshield Washer System
Four-Wheel Drive System
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery
Power) (Optional - 40A Fuse
Required)
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
Climate Control Blower
Tailgate Open/Close Assist
Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
Relays
FAN HI
FAN LO
ENG EXH VLV
FAN CNTRL
HDLP LO/HID
FOG LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
PWR/TRN
FUEL PMP
PRK LAMP
REAR DEFOG
RUN/CRANK
Usage
Cooling Fan High Speed
Cooling Fan Low Speed
Not Used
Cooling Fan Control
Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamps
Rear Defogger
Switched Power
625
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 644 for more information.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
4.3L V6 **
4.8L V8 **
5.3L V8 **
6.0L V8 *
6.0L V8 **
* 2500, 3500 series
** 1500 series
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8
626
Capacities
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more
information.
16.5 qt
16.9 qt
16.9 qt
16.4 qt
16.8 qt
15.6 L
16.0 L
16.0 L
15.5 L
15.9 L
4.5 qt
6.0 qt
4.3 L
5.7 L
Application
Capacities
English
Metric
Fuel Tank
1500 Series Standard and Short Box
26.0 gal
98.0 L
1500 Series Long Box
34.0 gal
128.7 L
2500 Series and 3500 Series
34.0 gal
128.7 L
3500 Series Chassis Cab
50.0 gal
189.0 L
3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank
27.0 gal
102.0 L
3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank
23.0 gal (if equipped)
87.0 L
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
Auto 4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E Electronic
5.0 qt
4.7 L
Transmission
Auto 4-Speed Transmission 4L70-E Super Duty
5.0 qt
4.7 L
Transmission
Auto 6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E
6.0 qt
5.7 L
Auto 6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E
6.3 qt
6.0 L
Auto 6-Speed Transmission Allison
7.4 qt
7.0 L
Transfer Case Fluid
1.6 qt
1.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 ft lb
190 Y
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range.
627
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
4.3L V6
X
Automatic
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
4.8L V8
C
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Iron, Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™,
SFI, OHV
0
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Aluminum Flexible
Fuel with Active Fuel
Management™, SFI
3
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Aluminum with Active
Fuel Management™
M
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Iron with Active Fuel
Management™
J
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6.0L V8
K
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6.0L V8 with Active Fuel
Management™
Y
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
628
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 630
Introduction ............................................... 630
Maintenance Requirements ........................ 630
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 630
Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 631
Scheduled Maintenance
(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 633
Additional Required Services
(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 636
Maintenance Footnotes
(Gasoline Engine) .................................. 638
Owner Checks and Services ..................... 640
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000 km) ..................... 641
At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 641
At Least Once a Month ............................. 641
At Least Once a Year ............................... 642
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 644
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 646
Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 647
Maintenance Record .................................. 648
629
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with
a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel
engine, see the maintenance schedule section
in the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to
keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?
The Plan supplements your new vehicle
warranties. See your Warranty and Owner
Assistance booklet or your dealer for details.
630
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to
keep your vehicle in good working condition, but
also helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the air
we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire
inflation can increase the level of emissions from
your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and
to keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure to
maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not
know exactly how you will drive it. You may drive
very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you may drive long distances all the time in
very hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehicle
in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use
their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may
need more frequent checks and replacements.
So please read the following and note how
you drive. If you have any questions on how
to keep your vehicle in good condition, see
your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 428.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended
manner. See Off-Road Driving on page 394.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline
Octane on page 497.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
Engine) on page 633 should be performed
when indicated. See Additional Required Services
(Gasoline Engine) on page 636 and Maintenance
Footnotes (Gasoline Engine) on page 638 for
further information.
631
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, see your GM
Goodwrench® dealer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 495.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have
your GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
632
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for
your service needs, you will know that GM-trained
and supported service technicians will perform
the work using genuine GM parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 669.
Owner Checks and Services on page 640 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it, and
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle
in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 644 and Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 646.
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use
of genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance (Gasoline
Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with
a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel
engine, see the maintenance schedule section
in the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system may not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 511 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections
are required. Required services are described
in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended
that your first service be Maintenance I, your
second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
633
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on
within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on
at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine) on page 508.
Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 511. An Emission
Control Service.
Allison Transmission® only: Replace external transmission filter at the first
maintenance service performed on the vehicle.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter (Gasoline Engines) on page 513.
See footnote (p).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 574 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on
page 641.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
634
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Service
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
Inspect shields, vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR above
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only. See footnote (n).
•
635
Additional Required Services (Gasoline Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel engine,
see the maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
(Gasoline Engines) on page 513.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
Four-wheel drive only: Change transfer
case fluid (extreme duty service).
See footnotes (g) (l) and (m).
636
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
(80 000)
75,000
(120 000)
100,000
(160 000)
125,000
(200 000)
150,000
(240 000)
Four-wheel drive only: Change
transfer case fluid (normal service).
See footnotes (g) and (m).
•
•
•
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (k).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (q).
•
637
Maintenance Footnotes (Gasoline
Engine)
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with
a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel
engine, see the maintenance schedule section in
the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or
the California Air Resources Board has determined
that the failure to perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emission warranty or limit
recall liability prior to the completion of the
vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that
all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage, and parking
brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints on
2500/3500 series vehicles require lubrication but
should not be lubricated unless their temperature is
10°F (−12°C) or higher, or they could be damaged.
Control arm ball joints on 1500 series vehicles are
maintenance-free. Vehicles used under severe
commercial operating conditions require lubrication
on a regular basis every 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
638
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for
surface condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes
for wear or cracks. Inspect other brake parts,
including drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking
brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing
parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect
power steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
Visually check constant velocity joints, rubber
boots, and axle seals for leaks.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace
with genuine parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking,
or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper
blades, if contaminated. Replace wiper blades
that are worn or damaged. See Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 557 and Windshield
and Wiper Blades on page 612 for more
information.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and
all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors,
and anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door
hinges, hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, tailgate hinges,
tailgate linkage, tailgate handle pivot points,
latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks, and folding
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may
be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose
is unobstructed, clear, and free of debris.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter if the vehicle Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is over 8600 lbs or if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.
This service can be complex; you should
have your dealer/retailer perform this service.
See Engine Coolant on page 520 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
639
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate
a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if
needed.
required. This is a Noise Emission Control
Service. Applicable to vehicles sold in the
United States and recommended for
vehicles sold in Canada.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and
condition. Check that the purge valve, if the vehicle
has one, works properly. Replace as needed.
(p) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter or change indicator (if equipped)
at each engine oil change.
(l) Extreme Duty Service: Change transfer case
fluid if the vehicle is mainly driven off-road in
four-wheel drive, or is used for heavy trailer towing.
Farming, mining, forestry, and Department of
Natural Resources (DNR) vehicles meet this
definition.
(m) During any maintenance, if a power washer is
used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not directly spray the
transfer case output seals. High pressure water
can overcome the seals and contaminate the
transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer case and
should be replaced.
(n) Vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR
above 10,000 lbs (4 536 kg) only: Inspect shields
for damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as
640
(q) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability, and emission
control performance of your vehicle. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 644.
At the First 100, 1,000 and
6,000 Miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km)
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
Check dual wheel nut torque. For proper torque,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 626.
At Least Once a Month
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil
if necessary. See Engine Oil (Gasoline Engine)
on page 508 for further details.
Notice: It is important to check the engine
oil regularly and keep it at the proper
level. Failure to keep the engine oil at the
proper level can cause damage to the engine
not covered by your warranty.
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget
to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 567. Check to make sure the
spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 586.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Inspection and Rotation on page 574.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Engine Coolant on page 520 for further details.
641
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 169.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your GM Goodwrench®
dealer for service.
642
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking
Brake on page 169.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the
shift lever moves out of PARK (P), contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever
position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when
the shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only
in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking brake
followed by the regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
643
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush
any corrosive materials from the underbody.
Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where
mud and other debris can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with
a gasoline engine. If your vehicle has a diesel
engine, see the maintenance schedule section in
the DURAMAX® Diesel Engine Supplement.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Usage
Engine Oil
644
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil (Gasoline
Engine) on page 508.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 520.
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Washer
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
Key Lock
Cylinders
Floor Shift
Linkage
Chassis
Lubrication
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE
80W-90
Axle Lubricant
Front Axle
(GM
Part
No.
U.S. 89021671,
(1500 Series) in Canada 89021672).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Front Axle
Axle Lubricant
(1500 HD,
2500, 2500 HD, (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
and 3500
GM Specification 9986115.
Series)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
Rear Axle
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Transfer Case DEXRON®-VI Automatic
(Four-Wheel
Transmission Fluid.
Drive)
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline or
One-Piece
Propshaft
Spline
(Two-Wheel
Drive with
4-Speed
Auto. Trans.)
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,
in Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.
Usage
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
Hood Hinges
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Tailgate Hinge
and Linkage,
Folding Seats,
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points,
Hinges, Latch
Bolt, and
Linkage
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
645
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
GM dealer.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more
information.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
High Capacity
15908915
A3085C
Standard
15908916
A3086C*
4.3L V6
25010792
PF47
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8
89017524
PF48
4.3L V6
89017883
41-932
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8
12571164
41-985
15930910
—
Part
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades – 21.6 inches (55.0 cm)
*A1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
646
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V8 Engines
V6 Engines
(A) Air Conditioning Compressor
647
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the
service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on
page 630. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 640 can be added on the
following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
648
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
649
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
650
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information ....... 652
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 652
Online Owner Center ................................. 655
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 656
Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 656
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 657
Roadside Assistance Program ................... 658
Courtesy Transportation ............................. 661
Collision Damage Repair ........................... 664
Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 667
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..................... 667
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ............................ 668
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ...................................... 668
Service Publications Ordering
Information ............................................. 669
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ......... 670
Event Data Recorders ............................... 671
OnStar ...................................................... 672
Navigation System ..................................... 672
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) ................................ 672
651
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally,
any concerns with the sales transaction or
the operation of your vehicle will be resolved
by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur.
If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter
has already been reviewed with the sales,
service, or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without
further help, in the U.S., contact the Chevrolet
Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact General
Motors of Canada Customer Communication
Centre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give
the Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of the
instrument panel and visible through
the windshield.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
652
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General
Motors and your dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. However, if you continue to remain
unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined
in Steps 1 and 2, you should file with the Better
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to
enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you
may be required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a court action, use
of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and
the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited
by vehicle age, mileage, and other factors.
General Motors reserves the right to change
eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
653
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined
in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
654
For further information concerning eligibility
in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you may
write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can
be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers/retailers for service
nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges
only available to members.
Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web for
updated information and to register your vehicle.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
655
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of
hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text
Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment
available at its Customer Assistance Center.
Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the
toll-free number for assistance. However, if a
customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
656
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors
Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for
your vehicle, such as hand controls or a
wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of
time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GM
Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility
Program. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
657
Roadside Assistance Program
Services Provided
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872);
(Text telephone (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever occurs first, and, in Canada only, up to a
maximum coverage of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 in Canada). In Canada,
service to provide diesel may be restricted.
For safety reasons, propane and other
alternative fuels will not be provided
through this service.
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service will be
covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. A remote unlock may
be available if you have an active OnStar®
subscription. To ensure security, the driver
must present personal identification before
lock-out service is provided. In Canada, the
vehicle registration is also required.
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call
1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,
a person driving this vehicle without the consent
of the owner is not eligible for coverage.
658
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway
or Highway: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance is provided when the vehicle
is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in
good condition, when equipped and properly
inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer
is responsible for the repair or replacement of
the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at
no charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you
detailed, computer personalized maps,
highlighting your choice of either the most
direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along
with helpful travel information pertaining to
your trip.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests will be
limited to six per calendar year.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty
related vehicle disablement, while en route and
over 250 kilometres from the original point of
departure, you may qualify for trip interruption
expense assistance. This assistance covers
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum
of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense you
may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be
repaired.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts and
a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for trip
interruption expense assistance.
659
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There
may be times, when Roadside Assistance
cannot provide timely assistance. Your advisor
may authorize you to secure local emergency
road service, and you will be reimbursed up to
$100 upon submission of the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be
covered. However, any cost for parts and labor
for non-warranty repairs are the responsibility
of the driver.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become excessive
in frequency or type of occurrence.
660
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Courtesy Transportation
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
To enhance your ownership experience, we
and our participating dealers are proud to offer
Courtesy Transportation, a customer support
program for new vehicles.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included
in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors
of Canada Limited reserve the right to make
any changes or discontinue the Roadside
Assistance program at any time without
notification.
For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper
(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period
(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, interim transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation program.
Several courtesy transportation options are
available to assist in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty and is available only
at participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled
“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”
furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed
warranty coverage information.
661
Scheduling Service Appointments
Transportation Options
When your vehicle requires warranty service,
contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and
advising your service consultant of your
transportation needs, your dealer can help
minimize your inconvenience.
Warranty service can generally be completed
while you wait. However, if you are unable to
wait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenience
by providing several transportation options.
Depending on the circumstances, your dealer
can offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the
service department immediately, keep driving it
until it can be scheduled for service, unless,
of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,
please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
Shuttle Service
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so
as early in the work day as possible to allow for
the same day repair.
662
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation and participating dealers
can provide you with shuttle service to get you to
your destination with minimal interruption of your
daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service within reasonable time and distance
parameters for the dealer’s area.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
and public transportation is used as “shuttle
service”, the reimbursement is limited to the
associated shuttle allowance and must be
supported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.
customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with
a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for
a rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle
is kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rental
reimbursement will be limited and must be
supported by original receipts. This requires
that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible
for fuel usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond
the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service,
may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change or discontinue
Courtesy Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant
to the terms and conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
663
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and
quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made
with the same materials and construction methods
as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can
help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also
be used for repair. These parts are typically
removed from vehicles that were total losses in
prior accidents. In most cases, the parts being
recycled are from undamaged sections of
the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain
664
your vehicle’s originally designed appearance and
safety performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered
by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These
are made by companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,
these parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts
are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such
parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center
that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with
GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to
another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure
that no one else in your vehicle, or the
other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until
all matters have been taken care of. Move
your vehicle only if its position puts you
in danger or you are instructed to move
it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This will help guard
against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call
GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 658 for more
information.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs
with Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer
(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as you may be
charged at the end of your lease for poor quality
repairs.
665
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
• If possible, call your insurance company
the towing service will be taking it. Get a
card from the tow truck operator or write down
the driver’s name, the service’s name, and
the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle
before it is towed away. Make sure this
includes your insurance information and
registration if you keep these items in your
vehicle.
• Gather the important information you will
need from the other driver. Things like name,
address, phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,
model and model year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description
of the damage to the other vehicle.
from the scene of the accident. They will walk
you through the information they will need.
If they ask for a police report, phone or go
to the police department headquarters the
next day and you can get a copy of the report
for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there
are no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility
for your vehicle. Whether you select a
dealer/retailer or a private collision repair
facility to fix the damage, make sure you
are comfortable with them. Remember,
you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work
will be performed on your vehicle. If you have
a question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
666
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair
facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it
towed there. Specify to the facility that any required
replacement collision parts be original equipment
parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will
not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine
GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you
may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s
collision policy repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company. In such cases,
you can have control of the repair and parts choices
as long as cost stays within reasonable limits.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) immediately, in addition
to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation. If it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer/retailer,
or General Motors.
667
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
You can obtain information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition to notifying
General Motors of Canada Limited. Call them
at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
668
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, please notify
General Motors.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle
suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins’ give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for
owners and intended to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle. The owner
manual includes the Maintenance Schedule
for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are
available for current and past model GM vehicles.
To request an order form, specify year and
model name of the vehicle.
669
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on
the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the
vehicle’s performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses computer modules
to monitor and control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the conditions for
airbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crash
and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These
modules may store data to help your dealer/retailer
technician service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you operate
the vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption
or average speed. These modules may also retain
the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and
without incurring obligation. Allow ample time
for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are
to make checks payable in U.S. funds.
670
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of
litigation through the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM collects or receives
may also be used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for research purposes,
where a need is shown and the data is not tied to
a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
671
OnStar
®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe
to the OnStar® services, please refer to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions for information
on data collection and use. See also OnStar®
System on page 185 in this manual for more
information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system,
use of the system may result in the storage of
destinations, addresses, telephone numbers,
and other trip information. Please refer to
the navigation system operating manual for
information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
672
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for
functions such as tire pressure monitoring and
ignition system security, as well as in connection
with conveniences such as key fobs for remote
door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle
transmitters for garage door openers. RFID
technology in GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
A
Accessories and Modifications ..................... 494
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ..... 435
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ..................................................... 111
Additives, Fuel ............................................ 498
Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 617
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 143
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 513
Air Conditioning ......................... 240, 243, 244
Airbag
Off Light .................................................. 256
Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 258
Readiness Light ....................................... 256
Airbag System ............................................... 89
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates? ................................................. 98
When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 95
Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 92
Airbag Systems
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....................... 111
Airbag Off Switch ..................................... 100
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 98
Passenger Sensing System ...................... 103
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 110
Airbag Systems (cont.)
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 97
AM-FM Radio .............................................. 310
Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 375
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System .................................................... 375
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 383
Antilock Brake, System Warning Light ......... 263
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 613
Care of Safety Belts ................................ 610
Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 615
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 611
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 607
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 608
Finish Care .............................................. 611
Finish Damage ......................................... 614
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 610
Leather .................................................... 609
Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 614
Tires ........................................................ 614
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 614
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 615
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 611
Weatherstrips ........................................... 610
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 612
673
Appearance Care (cont.)
Ashtray .......................................................
Audio System ..............................................
AM-FM Radio ..........................................
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ...................
Fixed Mast Antenna .................................
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual .................................
Radio with CD ................................ 312,
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................
Setting the Time ......................................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................
Understanding Radio Reception ...............
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......
Audio System(s)
Radio with CD and DVD ..........................
Automatic Headlamp System .......................
Automatic Transmission
Fluid ........................................................
Operation .................................................
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch ..........
674
239
306
310
372
375
374
375
359
318
370
307
372
373
375
328
229
516
146
231
B
Battery ........................................................
Electric Power Management .....................
Run-Down Protection ...............................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................
Brake
Emergencies ............................................
Brakes ........................................................
System Warning Light ..............................
Braking .......................................................
Braking in Emergencies ...............................
Break-In, New Vehicle .................................
Bulb Replacement .......................................
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
and Cargo Lamp ..................................
Halogen Bulbs .........................................
Headlamps ...............................................
License Plate Lamps ................................
Pickup Box Identification and Fender
Marker Lamps ......................................
Replacement Bulbs ..................................
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .....................................
Buying New Tires ........................................
539
233
234
418
385
535
262
382
385
139
552
553
552
552
556
554
557
555
578
C
Calibration .......................................... 175, 178
California Fuel ............................................. 497
California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 495
Canadian Owners ........................................... 3
Capacities and Specifications ...................... 626
Carbon Monoxide .............. 129, 173, 422, 449
Care of
Safety Belts ............................................. 610
Your CD and DVD Player ........................ 375
Your CDs and DVDs ................................ 374
Cargo Lamp ................................................ 233
Cargo Management System ........................ 204
CD, MP3 ............................................ 345, 351
Center Console Storage Area ...................... 202
Center Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ........................................ 37, 38
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
and Cargo Lamp ...................................... 553
Center Seat .................................................. 19
Chains, Tire ................................................. 584
Charging System Light ................................ 260
Check
Engine Light ............................................ 266
Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 504
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 615
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................. 53
Infants and Young Children ........................ 49
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 60
Older Children ........................................... 46
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position .......................................... 72
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position ..................... 74
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position .......... 75, 81, 85
Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 58
Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 239
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 613
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 611
Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 608
Finish Care .............................................. 611
Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 607
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces .................................... 610
Leather .................................................... 609
Tires ........................................................ 614
Underbody Maintenance ........................... 614
Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 611
Weatherstrips ........................................... 610
Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 612
675
Cleaning (cont.)
Climate Control System ...................... 240, 243
Dual Automatic ......................................... 244
Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 251
Clock .......................................................... 307
Collision Damage Repair ............................. 664
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 42
Compass ............................................ 175, 178
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 135
Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 382
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 264
Heater, Engine ......................................... 144
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ........................ 523
Cooling System ........................................... 527
Cruise Control ............................................. 224
Cruise Control Light .................................... 271
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 201
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation ........................... 661
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 656
Customer Assistance Offices .................... 656
Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 652
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 657
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors .................................................. 668
676
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ..........................
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ....................
Roadside Assistance Program ..................
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...........................................
668
667
658
669
D
Daytime Running Lamps .............................
Defensive Driving ........................................
Delayed Locking ..........................................
Disc, MP3 .......................................... 345,
Doing Your Own Service Work ....................
Dome Lamp Override ..................................
Dome Lamps ...............................................
Door
Delayed Locking ......................................
Locks .......................................................
Power Door Locks ...................................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......
Rear Door Security Locks ........................
Rear Doors ..............................................
228
378
126
351
495
232
232
126
125
126
126
127
128
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ................................... 28
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 273
DIC Operation and Displays ............ 274, 281
DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 295
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 285
Driving
At Night ................................................... 411
City .......................................................... 416
Defensive ................................................. 378
Drunken ................................................... 379
Freeway ................................................... 417
Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 420
In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 412
Off-Road .................................................. 394
Recovery Hooks ....................................... 427
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 426
Winter ...................................................... 422
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 244
Dual Tire Operation ..................................... 568
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System ............. 359
E
EDR ............................................................
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ...................................
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Power Windows and Other Power
Options .................................................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...........................
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................
Check and Service Engine Soon Light .....
Coolant ....................................................
Coolant Heater .........................................
Coolant Temperature Gage ......................
Drive Belt Routing ....................................
Engine Compartment Overview ................
Exhaust ...................................................
Fan Noise ................................................
Oil ...........................................................
Oil Life System ........................................
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ......
Overheating .............................................
Running While Parked .............................
Starting ....................................................
670
617
620
618
618
617
621
617
513
266
520
144
264
647
506
173
532
508
511
526
523
174
141
677
Entry Lighting .............................................. 232
Event Data Recorders ................................. 671
Exit Lighting ................................................ 232
Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 45
Exterior Lamps ............................................ 227
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................
Finish Damage ............................................
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................
Flashers, Hazard Warning ...........................
Flash-to-Pass ..............................................
Flat Tire ......................................................
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................
Flat Tire, Storing .........................................
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ............................
Power Steering ........................................
Windshield Washer ..................................
Fog Lamp
Fog ..........................................................
Fog Lamp Light ...........................................
Four-Wheel Drive ............................... 154,
Four-Wheel-Drive Light ................................
Front Axle ...................................................
678
513
614
375
217
220
585
586
602
516
532
533
230
271
548
271
550
Fuel ............................................................
Additives ..................................................
California Fuel ..........................................
E85 (85% Ethanol) ...................................
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..............
Filling Your Tank ......................................
Fuels in Foreign Countries .......................
Gage .......................................................
Gasoline Octane ......................................
Gasoline Specifications ............................
Low Warning Light ...................................
Fuses
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ...................
Underhood Fuse Block .............................
Windshield Wiper .....................................
496
498
497
499
503
500
500
272
497
497
273
620
618
618
621
617
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ....................
Fuel .........................................................
Oil Pressure .............................................
Speedometer ...........................................
Tachometer ..............................................
Voltmeter Gage ........................................
264
272
269
254
254
261
Garage Door Opener ...................................
Gasoline
Octane .....................................................
Specifications ...........................................
Glove Box ...................................................
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ..........
189
497
497
201
657
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 217
Head Restraints ............................................ 18
Headlamps .................................................. 552
Bulb Replacement .................................... 552
Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 228
Exterior Lamps ......................................... 227
Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 220
Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 552
High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 220
On Reminder ........................................... 228
Pickup Box Identification and Fender
Marker Lamps ...................................... 554
Heated Seats ................................................ 12
Heater ................................................ 240, 243
Heater ......................................................... 244
Highbeam On Light ..................................... 271
Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 419
Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 420
Hood
Checking Things Under ............................ 504
Release ................................................... 504
Horn ............................................................ 217
How to Use This Manual ................................ 4
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 27
I
Ignition Positions ......................................... 140
Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 49
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 567
Instrument Panel
Overview ......................................... 212, 215
Storage Area ............................................ 202
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness ................................................ 231
Cluster ..................................................... 253
J
Jump Starting .............................................. 540
K
Keyless Entry System ................................. 118
Keys ........................................................... 117
679
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 560
Lamps
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .................. 231
Cargo ...................................................... 233
Dome ....................................................... 232
Dome Lamp Override ............................... 232
Puddle ..................................................... 230
Reading ................................................... 232
LATCH System
Child Restraints ......................................... 60
Latches, Seatback ......................................... 19
License Plate Lamps ................................... 556
Light
Airbag Off ................................................ 256
Airbag Readiness ..................................... 256
Antilock Brake System Warning ................ 263
Brake System Warning ............................. 262
Charging System ..................................... 260
Cruise Control .......................................... 271
Fog Lamp ................................................ 271
Four-Wheel-Drive ..................................... 271
Highbeam On .......................................... 271
Low Fuel Warning .................................... 273
Malfunction Indicator ................................ 266
Oil Pressure ............................................. 270
680
Light (cont.)
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder ..............
Safety Belt Reminder ...............................
Security ...................................................
StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................
Tire Pressure ...........................................
Tow/Haul Mode ........................................
Lighting
Entry ........................................................
Exit ..........................................................
Lights
Exterior Lamps .........................................
Flash-to-Pass ...........................................
High/Low Beam Changer .........................
On Reminder ...........................................
Loading Your Vehicle ...................................
Locking Rear Axle .......................................
Lockout Protection .......................................
Locks
Delayed Locking ......................................
Door ........................................................
Lockout Protection ...................................
Power Door .............................................
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......
Rear Door Security Locks ........................
Loss of Control ...........................................
258
255
255
270
264
265
272
232
232
227
220
220
228
428
385
128
126
125
128
126
126
127
393
Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 273
Luggage Carrier .......................................... 203
Lumbar
Manual Controls ......................................... 11
Power Controls .......................................... 11
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services .................... 636
At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 641
At Least Once a Month ............................ 641
At Least Once a Year .............................. 642
At the First 100, 1,000 and 6,000 Miles
(160, 1 600 and 10 000km) .................. 641
Introduction .............................................. 630
Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 638
Maintenance Record ................................ 648
Maintenance Requirements ...................... 630
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 646
Owner Checks and Services .................... 640
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 644
Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 633
Using ....................................................... 631
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 630
Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 266
Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 11
Manual Seats .................................................. 9
Manual Windows ......................................... 131
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................ 13
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 285
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
Compass and Temperature Display ....... 178
Automatic Dimming Rearview with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ................................................. 175
Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 175
Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 179
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .............. 182
Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 181
Outside Trailer-Tow Mirrors ....................... 180
MP3 ................................................... 345, 351
MyGMLink.com ............................................ 655
N
Navigation System, Privacy .........................
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ...................................
New Vehicle Break-In ..................................
Noise Control System, Tampering ................
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .......
672
359
139
551
646
681
O
Odometer .................................................... 254
Odometer, Trip ............................................ 254
Off-Road Driving .......................................... 394
Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 391
Oil
Engine ..................................................... 508
Pressure Gage ......................................... 269
Pressure Light .......................................... 270
Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 511
Older Children, Restraints ............................. 46
Online Owner Center ................................... 655
OnStar, Privacy ........................................... 672
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 185
Operation, Universal Home Remote
System ............................................ 190, 194
Other Warning Devices ................................ 217
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 251
Outlets
Accessory Power ..................................... 238
Outside
Manual Mirrors ......................................... 179
Power Foldaway Mirrors ........................... 182
Power Mirrors .......................................... 181
Trailer-Tow Mirrors ................................... 180
682
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode ....................................... 526
Owner Checks and Services ....................... 640
Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3
P
Paint, Damage ............................................ 614
Park Aid ...................................................... 234
Park Brake .................................................. 169
Park (P)
Shifting Into ............................................. 170
Shifting Out of ......................................... 172
Parking
Assist ....................................................... 234
Over Things That Burn ............................ 172
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 258
Passenger Sensing System ......................... 103
Passing ....................................................... 391
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 137
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 137
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .............. 443
Power
Door Locks .............................................. 126
Electrical System ..................................... 617
Lumbar Controls ........................................ 11
Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 141
Power (cont.)
Seat .......................................................... 10
Sliding Rear Window ................................ 134
Steering Fluid .......................................... 532
Windows .................................................. 132
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 45
Privacy ........................................................ 670
Event Data Recorders .............................. 671
Navigation System ................................... 672
OnStar ..................................................... 672
Radio Frequency Identification .................. 672
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 126
Puddle Lamps ............................................. 230
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 26
R
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),
Privacy .....................................................
Radios ........................................................
AM-FM Radio ..........................................
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ............
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ...................
Navigation/Radio System, see
Navigation Manual ................................
672
306
310
375
374
359
Radios (cont.)
Radio with CD ................................ 312, 318
Radio with CD and DVD .......................... 328
Rear Seat Audio ...................................... 370
Setting the Time ...................................... 307
Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 372
Understanding Reception ......................... 373
Rainsense™ II Wipers ................................. 222
Reading Lamps ........................................... 232
Rear Axle .................................................... 546
Locking .................................................... 385
Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 127
Rear Doors ................................................. 128
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 42
Rear Seat Armrest ...................................... 204
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 370
Rear Seat Entertainment System ................. 359
Rear Seat Operation .............................. 20, 21
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 39
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display .......... 178
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ..................................................... 175
Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 175
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 15
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 644
683
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 427
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 443
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 118
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,
Operation ................................................. 119
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire .......................................... 592
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 588
Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 557
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government ............................. 668
General Motors ........................................ 668
United States Government ....................... 667
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems ............... 112
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ........................................ 113
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 141
Right Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ............................................... 37
Roadside
Assistance Program ................................. 658
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 426
Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 647
Running the Engine While Parked ............... 174
684
S
Safety Belt
Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 255
Pretensioners ............................................. 45
Reminder Light ........................................ 255
Safety Belts
Care of .................................................... 610
Center Front Passenger Position ......... 37, 38
Driver Position ........................................... 28
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 27
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts ....................................................... 26
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 42
Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 39
Right Front Passenger Position .................. 37
Safety Belt Extender .................................. 45
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 36
Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 22
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 35
Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4
Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 633
Seatback Latches .......................................... 19
Seats
Center Seat ............................................... 19
Head Restraints ......................................... 18
Heated Seats ............................................. 12
Manual Lumbar .......................................... 11
Memory, Mirrors and Pedals ...................... 13
Seats (cont.)
Power Lumbar ........................................... 11
Power Seats .............................................. 10
Rear Seat Operation ........................... 20, 21
Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 15
Seatback Latches ...................................... 19
Secondary Latch System ............................. 598
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ......................... 74
Rear Seat Position ..................................... 72
Right Front Seat Position ............. 75, 81, 85
Security Light .............................................. 270
Service ........................................................ 494
Accessories and Modifications .................. 494
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ..................................... 496
California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 495
Doing Your Own Work ............................. 495
Engine Soon Light ................................... 266
Publications Ordering Information ............. 669
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 110
Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 614
Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 170
Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 172
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 35
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 219
Sliding Rear Window, Power ....................... 134
Snow Plow ..................................................
Spare Tire ...................................................
Installing ..................................................
Removing ................................................
Storing .....................................................
Specifications, Capacities ............................
Speedometer ...............................................
StabiliTrak® System .....................................
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ...........................
Starting Your Engine ...................................
Steering ......................................................
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ...................
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ..........................
Storage Areas .............................................
Cargo Management System .....................
Center Console Storage Area ...................
Cupholder(s) ............................................
Glove Box ................................................
Instrument Panel Storage Area .................
Luggage Carrier .......................................
Rear Seat Armrest ...................................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ...............
Sun Visors ..................................................
Sunroof .......................................................
System Identification, Universal Home
Remote System .......................................
435
606
592
588
602
626
254
385
264
141
389
372
218
201
204
202
201
201
202
203
204
426
135
205
188
685
T
Tachometer .................................................
Tailgate .......................................................
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .....................................
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..............................
Content Theft-Deterrent ............................
PASS-Key® III+ ........................................
PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................
Tilt Wheel ....................................................
Time, Setting ...............................................
Tire
Pressure Light ..........................................
Tires ...........................................................
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated
Wheels, Cleaning ..................................
Buying New Tires .....................................
Chains .....................................................
Changing a Flat Tire ................................
Cleaning ..................................................
Different Size ...........................................
686
254
129
555
372
135
135
137
137
218
307
265
558
613
578
584
586
614
580
Tires (cont.)
Dual Tire Operation ..................................
If a Tire Goes Flat ...................................
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................
Inspection and Rotation ............................
Installing the Spare Tire ...........................
Pressure Monitor System .........................
Removing the Flat Tire .............................
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .........
Secondary Latch System .........................
Spare Tire ................................................
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools .....
Tire Sidewall Labeling ..............................
Tire Terminology and Definitions ...............
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ...........
Wheel Replacement .................................
When It Is Time for New Tires .................
Tow/Haul Mode ...........................................
Tow/Haul Mode Light ...................................
Towing
Recreational Vehicle .................................
Towing a Trailer .......................................
Your Vehicle .............................................
568
585
567
574
592
569
592
588
598
606
602
560
564
581
582
582
577
152
272
443
449
443
Traction
StabiliTrak® System .................................
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic .......................................
Transmission Operation, Automatic ..............
Trip Odometer .............................................
Truck-Camper Loading Information ..............
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...................
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ....................
385
490
516
146
254
439
219
218
U
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........
Understanding Radio Reception ...................
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......................
Universal Home Remote System .................
Operation ........................................ 190,
System Identification ................................
234
373
581
189
194
188
V
Vehicle
Control ..................................................... 382
Damage Warnings ....................................... 5
Loading .................................................... 428
Symbols ...................................................... 5
Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 295
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ............ 670
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) .......................................... 616
Service Parts Identification Label .............. 617
Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 251
Visors .......................................................... 135
Voltmeter Gage ........................................... 261
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 252
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 285
Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 217
Other Warning Devices ............................ 217
Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4
Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5
687
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..................... 582
Different Size ........................................... 580
Replacement ............................................ 582
Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 58
Windows ..................................................... 131
Manual ..................................................... 131
Power ...................................................... 132
Sliding Rear ............................................. 134
Windshield
Rainsense™ II Wipers ............................. 222
Washer .................................................... 223
Washer Fluid ........................................... 533
Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 557
Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 612
Wiper Fuses ............................................ 617
Wipers ..................................................... 221
Winter Driving ............................................. 422
688
X
XM Radio Messages ................................... 357
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 375
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ............... 630